diff options
| author | Jason Barron <jbarron@trolltech.com> | 2009-08-18 06:34:18 (GMT) |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Jason Barron <jbarron@trolltech.com> | 2009-08-18 06:34:18 (GMT) |
| commit | fd6740b6ade6e7f8e51a9cc558b723e7fae15ccf (patch) | |
| tree | aa2ba4ce64d047d73c29ab0616e8a89d352c3abd /src/corelib | |
| parent | d24029e3d4639f1300e7a68858936911df969f69 (diff) | |
| parent | 572e165dcb8cc8fcdfaa4ab9bdab050f6a6cc173 (diff) | |
| download | Qt-fd6740b6ade6e7f8e51a9cc558b723e7fae15ccf.zip Qt-fd6740b6ade6e7f8e51a9cc558b723e7fae15ccf.tar.gz Qt-fd6740b6ade6e7f8e51a9cc558b723e7fae15ccf.tar.bz2 | |
Merge commit 'qt/master'
Conflicts:
doc/src/examples.qdoc
doc/src/plugins-howto.qdoc
doc/src/topics.qdoc
examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp
src/3rdparty/freetype/src/base/ftobjs.c
src/corelib/global/qglobal.h
src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.h
src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp
src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp
src/corelib/tools/tools.pri
src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.h
src/gui/painting/painting.pri
src/gui/widgets/qdatetimeedit.cpp
tests/auto/qdesktopservices/qdesktopservices.pro
tests/auto/qgraphicsitem/tst_qgraphicsitem.cpp
tests/auto/qtextcodec/test/test.pro
Diffstat (limited to 'src/corelib')
109 files changed, 8626 insertions, 764 deletions
diff --git a/src/corelib/animation/qparallelanimationgroup_p.h b/src/corelib/animation/qparallelanimationgroup_p.h index 65bf693..db804d5 100644 --- a/src/corelib/animation/qparallelanimationgroup_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/animation/qparallelanimationgroup_p.h @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ #include "qparallelanimationgroup.h" #include "private/qanimationgroup_p.h" -#include <QtCore/QHash> +#include <QtCore/qhash.h> #ifndef QT_NO_ANIMATION diff --git a/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp b/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp index 598e994..35d65d0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/animation/qpropertyanimation.cpp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ \class QPropertyAnimation \brief The QPropertyAnimation class animates Qt properties \since 4.6 - \mainclass + \ingroup animation QPropertyAnimation interpolates over \l{Qt's Property System}{Qt @@ -293,7 +293,12 @@ void QPropertyAnimation::updateState(QAbstractAnimation::State oldState, hash.insert(key, this); // update the default start value if (oldState == Stopped) { - d->setDefaultStartValue(d->target->property(d->propertyName.constData())); + d->setDefaultStartEndValue(d->target->property(d->propertyName.constData())); + //let's check if we have a start value and an end value + if (d->direction == Forward && !startValue().isValid() && !d->defaultStartEndValue.isValid()) + qWarning("QPropertyAnimation::updateState: starting an animation without start value"); + if (d->direction == Backward && !endValue().isValid() && !d->defaultStartEndValue.isValid()) + qWarning("QPropertyAnimation::updateState: starting an animation without end value"); } } else if (hash.value(key) == this) { hash.remove(key); diff --git a/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation.cpp b/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation.cpp index e647318..fc11815 100644 --- a/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation.cpp @@ -220,52 +220,39 @@ void QVariantAnimationPrivate::updateInterpolator() */ void QVariantAnimationPrivate::recalculateCurrentInterval(bool force/*=false*/) { - // can't interpolate if we have only 1 key value - if ((keyValues.count() + (defaultStartValue.isValid() ? 1 : 0)) <=1) + // can't interpolate if we don't have at least 2 values + if ((keyValues.count() + (defaultStartEndValue.isValid() ? 1 : 0)) < 2) return; const qreal progress = easing.valueForProgress(((duration == 0) ? qreal(1) : qreal(currentTime) / qreal(duration))); - if (force || progress < currentInterval.start.first || progress > currentInterval.end.first) { + //0 and 1 are still the boundaries + if (force || (currentInterval.start.first > 0 && progress < currentInterval.start.first) + || (currentInterval.end.first < 1 && progress > currentInterval.end.first)) { //let's update currentInterval QVariantAnimation::KeyValues::const_iterator it = qLowerBound(keyValues.constBegin(), - keyValues.constEnd(), - qMakePair(progress, QVariant()), - animationValueLessThan); - if (it == keyValues.constEnd()) { - if (direction == QVariantAnimation::Backward && defaultStartValue.isValid()) { - --it; - if (it->first == 1) { - //we have an end value (item with progress = 1) - currentInterval.start = *(it-1); - currentInterval.end = *it; - } else if (direction == QVariantAnimation::Backward && defaultStartValue.isValid()) { - //the default start value should be used as the default end value - currentInterval.start = *it; - currentInterval.end = qMakePair(qreal(1), defaultStartValue); - } else { - ///This should not happen - } - } - } else if (it == keyValues.constBegin()) { - if (it+1 != keyValues.constEnd() && (it->first == progress || it->first == 0)) { - //the item pointed to by it is the start element in the range - //we also test if the current element is for progress 0 (ie the real start) because - //some easing curves might get the progress below 0. + keyValues.constEnd(), + qMakePair(progress, QVariant()), + animationValueLessThan); + if (it == keyValues.constBegin()) { + //the item pointed to by it is the start element in the range + if (it->first == 0 && keyValues.count() > 1) { currentInterval.start = *it; currentInterval.end = *(it+1); - } else if (defaultStartValue.isValid()) { - if (direction == QVariantAnimation::Forward) { - //we should have an end value - currentInterval.start = qMakePair(qreal(0), defaultStartValue); - currentInterval.end = *it; - } else { - //we should have a start value - currentInterval.start = *it; - currentInterval.end = qMakePair(qreal(1), defaultStartValue); - } } else { - ///this should not happen + currentInterval.start = qMakePair(qreal(0), defaultStartEndValue); + currentInterval.end = *it; + } + } else if (it == keyValues.constEnd()) { + --it; //position the iterator on the last item + if (it->first == 1 && keyValues.count() > 1) { + //we have an end value (item with progress = 1) + currentInterval.start = *(it-1); + currentInterval.end = *it; + } else { + //we use the default end value here + currentInterval.start = *it; + currentInterval.end = qMakePair(qreal(1), defaultStartEndValue); } } else { currentInterval.start = *(it-1); @@ -329,9 +316,9 @@ void QVariantAnimationPrivate::setValueAt(qreal step, const QVariant &value) recalculateCurrentInterval(/*force=*/true); } -void QVariantAnimationPrivate::setDefaultStartValue(const QVariant &value) +void QVariantAnimationPrivate::setDefaultStartEndValue(const QVariant &value) { - defaultStartValue = value; + defaultStartEndValue = value; recalculateCurrentInterval(/*force=*/true); } diff --git a/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation_p.h b/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation_p.h index 9c9d25b..ef57a4c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/animation/qvariantanimation_p.h @@ -76,14 +76,14 @@ public: return q->d_func(); } - void setDefaultStartValue(const QVariant &value); + void setDefaultStartEndValue(const QVariant &value); int duration; QEasingCurve easing; QVariantAnimation::KeyValues keyValues; QVariant currentValue; - QVariant defaultStartValue; + QVariant defaultStartEndValue; //this is used to keep track of the KeyValue interval in which we currently are struct diff --git a/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.pri b/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.pri index 2e247e5..724b18d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.pri +++ b/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.pri @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ unix { SOURCES += codecs/qiconvcodec.cpp DEFINES += GNU_LIBICONV - !mac:LIBS *= -liconv + !mac:LIBS_PRIVATE *= -liconv } else { # no iconv, so we put all plugins in the library HEADERS += \ diff --git a/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.qdoc b/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9cffa85 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/codecs/codecs.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,546 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \group codecs + \title Codecs + \ingroup groups + \brief Codec support in Qt. + + These codecs provide facilities for conversion between Unicode and + specific text encodings. + + \generatelist{related} +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-big5.html + \title Big5 Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The Big5 codec provides conversion to and from the Big5 encoding. + The code was originally contributed by Ming-Che Chuang + \<mingche@cobra.ee.ntu.edu.tw\> for the Big-5+ encoding, and was + included in Qt with the author's permission, and the grateful + thanks of the Qt team. (Note: Ming-Che's code is QPL'd, as + per an mail to qt-info@nokia.com.) + + However, since Big-5+ was never formally approved, and was never + used by anyone, the Taiwan Free Software community and the Li18nux + Big5 Standard Subgroup agree that the de-facto standard Big5-ETen + (zh_TW.Big5 or zh_TW.TW-Big5) be used instead. + + The Big5 is currently implemented as a pure subset of the + Big5-HKSCS codec, so more fine-tuning is needed to make it + identical to the standard Big5 mapping as determined by + Li18nux-Big5. See \l{http://www.autrijus.org/xml/} for the draft + Big5 (2002) standard. + + James Su \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\> + generated the Big5-HKSCS-to-Unicode tables with a very + space-efficient algorithm. He generously donated his code to glibc + in May 2002. Subsequently, James has kindly allowed Anthony Fok + \<anthony@thizlinux.com\> \<foka@debian.org\> to adapt the code + for Qt. + + \legalese + Copyright (C) 2000 Ming-Che Chuang \BR + Copyright (C) 2002 James Su, Turbolinux Inc. \BR + Copyright (C) 2002 Anthony Fok, ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-big5hkscs.html + \title Big5-HKSCS Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The Big5-HKSCS codec provides conversion to and from the + Big5-HKSCS encoding. + + The codec grew out of the QBig5Codec originally contributed by + Ming-Che Chuang \<mingche@cobra.ee.ntu.edu.tw\>. James Su + \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\> and Anthony Fok + \<anthony@thizlinux.com\> \<foka@debian.org\> implemented HKSCS-1999 + QBig5hkscsCodec for Qt-2.3.x, but it was too late in Qt development + schedule to be officially included in the Qt-2.3.x series. + + Wu Yi \<wuyi@hancom.com\> ported the HKSCS-1999 QBig5hkscsCodec to + Qt-3.0.1 in March 2002. + + With the advent of the new HKSCS-2001 standard, James Su + \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\> generated the + Big5-HKSCS<->Unicode tables with a very space-efficient algorithm. + He generously donated his code to glibc in May 2002. Subsequently, + James has generously allowed Anthony Fok to adapt the code for + Qt-3.0.5. + + Currently, the Big5-HKSCS tables are generated from the following + sources, and with the Euro character added: + \list 1 + \o \l{http://www.microsoft.com/typography/unicode/950.txt} + \o \l{http://www.info.gov.hk/digital21/chi/hkscs/download/big5-iso.txt} + \o \l{http://www.info.gov.hk/digital21/chi/hkscs/download/big5cmp.txt} + \endlist + + There may be more fine-tuning to the QBig5hkscsCodec to maximize its + compatibility with the standard Big5 (2002) mapping as determined by + Li18nux Big5 Standard Subgroup. See \l{http://www.autrijus.org/xml/} + for the various Big5 CharMapML tables. + + \legalese + Copyright (C) 2000 Ming-Che Chuang \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 James Su, Turbolinux Inc. \BR + Copyright (C) 2002 WU Yi, HancomLinux Inc. \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 Anthony Fok, ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-eucjp.html + \title EUC-JP Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The EUC-JP codec provides conversion to and from EUC-JP, the main + legacy encoding for Unix machines in Japan. + + The environment variable \c UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to + fine-tune the JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC-JP codecs. The \l{ISO + 2022-JP (JIS) Text Codec} documentation describes how to use this + variable. + + Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa, + a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in Qt with the author's + permission and the grateful thanks of the Qt team. Here is + the copyright statement for that code: + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS". + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-euckr.html + \title EUC-KR Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The EUC-KR codec provides conversion to and from EUC-KR, KR, the + main legacy encoding for Unix machines in Korea. + + It was largely written by Mizi Research Inc. Here is the + copyright statement for the code as it was at the point of + contribution. The subsequent modifications are covered by + the usual copyright for Qt. + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999-2000 Mizi Research Inc. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-gbk.html + \title GBK Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The GBK codec provides conversion to and from the Chinese + GB18030/GBK/GB2312 encoding. + + GBK, formally the Chinese Internal Code Specification, is a commonly + used extension of GB 2312-80. Microsoft Windows uses it under the + name codepage 936. + + GBK has been superseded by the new Chinese national standard + GB 18030-2000, which added a 4-byte encoding while remaining + compatible with GB2312 and GBK. The new GB 18030-2000 may be described + as a special encoding of Unicode 3.x and ISO-10646-1. + + Special thanks to charset gurus Markus Scherer (IBM), + Dirk Meyer (Adobe Systems) and Ken Lunde (Adobe Systems) for publishing + an excellent GB 18030-2000 summary and specification on the Internet. + Some must-read documents are: + + \list + \o \l{ftp://ftp.oreilly.com/pub/examples/nutshell/cjkv/pdf/GB18030_Summary.pdf} + \o \l{http://oss.software.ibm.com/cvs/icu/~checkout~/charset/source/gb18030/gb18030.html} + \o \l{http://oss.software.ibm.com/cvs/icu/~checkout~/charset/data/xml/gb-18030-2000.xml} + \endlist + + The GBK codec was contributed to Qt by + Justin Yu \<justiny@turbolinux.com.cn\> and + Sean Chen \<seanc@turbolinux.com.cn\>. They may also be reached at + Yu Mingjian \<yumj@sun.ihep.ac.cn\>, \<yumingjian@china.com\> + Chen Xiangyang \<chenxy@sun.ihep.ac.cn\> + + The GB18030 codec Qt functions were contributed to Qt by + James Su \<suzhe@gnuchina.org\>, \<suzhe@turbolinux.com.cn\> + who pioneered much of GB18030 development on GNU/Linux systems. + + The GB18030 codec was contributed to Qt by + Anthony Fok \<anthony@thizlinux.com\>, \<foka@debian.org\> + using a Perl script to generate C++ tables from gb-18030-2000.xml + while merging contributions from James Su, Justin Yu and Sean Chen. + A copy of the source Perl script is available at + \l{http://people.debian.org/~foka/gb18030/gen-qgb18030codec.pl} + + The copyright notice for their code follows: + + \legalese + Copyright (C) 2000 TurboLinux, Inc. Written by Justin Yu and Sean Chen. \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 Turbolinux, Inc. Written by James Su. \BR + Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 ThizLinux Laboratory Ltd. Written by Anthony Fok. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codecs-jis.html + \title ISO 2022-JP (JIS) Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The JIS codec provides conversion to and from ISO 2022-JP. + + The environment variable \c UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to + fine-tune the JIS, Shift-JIS, and EUC-JP codecs. The mapping + names are as for the Japanese XML working group's \link + http://www.y-adagio.com/public/standards/tr_xml_jpf/toc.htm XML + Japanese Profile\endlink, because it names and explains all the + widely used mappings. Here are brief descriptions, written by + Serika Kurusugawa: + + \list + + \o "unicode-0.9" or "unicode-0201" for Unicode style. This assumes + JISX0201 for 0x00-0x7f. (0.9 is a table version of jisx02xx mapping + used for Unicode 1.1.) + + \o "unicode-ascii" This assumes US-ASCII for 0x00-0x7f; some + chars (JISX0208 0x2140 and JISX0212 0x2237) are different from + Unicode 1.1 to avoid conflict. + + \o "open-19970715-0201" ("open-0201" for convenience) or + "jisx0221-1995" for JISX0221-JISX0201 style. JIS X 0221 is JIS + version of Unicode, but a few chars (0x5c, 0x7e, 0x2140, 0x216f, + 0x2131) are different from Unicode 1.1. This is used when 0x5c is + treated as YEN SIGN. + + \o "open-19970715-ascii" ("open-ascii" for convenience) for + JISX0221-ASCII style. This is used when 0x5c is treated as REVERSE + SOLIDUS. + + \o "open-19970715-ms" ("open-ms" for convenience) or "cp932" for + Microsoft Windows style. Windows Code Page 932. Some chars (0x2140, + 0x2141, 0x2142, 0x215d, 0x2171, 0x2172) are different from Unicode + 1.1. + + \o "jdk1.1.7" for Sun's JDK style. Same as Unicode 1.1, except that + JIS 0x2140 is mapped to UFF3C. Either ASCII or JISX0201 can be used + for 0x00-0x7f. + + \endlist + + In addition, the extensions "nec-vdc", "ibm-vdc" and "udc" are + supported. + + For example, if you want to use Unicode style conversion but with + NEC's extension, set \c UNICODEMAP_JP to \c {unicode-0.9, + nec-vdc}. (You will probably need to quote that in a shell + command.) + + Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa, + a.k.a. Junji Takagi, and is included in Qt with the author's + permission and the grateful thanks of the Qt team. Here is + the copyright statement for that code: + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS". + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-sjis.html + \title Shift-JIS Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The Shift-JIS codec provides conversion to and from Shift-JIS, an + encoding of JIS X 0201 Latin, JIS X 0201 Kana and JIS X 0208. + + The environment variable \c UNICODEMAP_JP can be used to + fine-tune the codec. The \l{ISO 2022-JP (JIS) Text Codec} + documentation describes how to use this variable. + + Most of the code here was written by Serika Kurusugawa, a.k.a. + Junji Takagi, and is included in Qt with the author's permission + and the grateful thanks of the Qt team. Here is the + copyright statement for the code as it was at the point of + contribution. The subsequent modifications are covered by + the usual copyright for Qt. + + \legalese + + Copyright (C) 1999 Serika Kurusugawa. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS". + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ + +/*! + \page codec-tscii.html + \title TSCII Text Codec + \ingroup codecs + + The TSCII codec provides conversion to and from the Tamil TSCII + encoding. + + TSCII, formally the Tamil Standard Code Information Interchange + specification, is a commonly used charset for Tamils. The + official page for the standard is at + \link http://www.tamil.net/tscii/ http://www.tamil.net/tscii/\endlink + + This codec uses the mapping table found at + \link http://www.geocities.com/Athens/5180/tsciiset.html + http://www.geocities.com/Athens/5180/tsciiset.html\endlink. + Tamil uses composed Unicode which might cause some + problems if you are using Unicode fonts instead of TSCII fonts. + + Most of the code was written by Hans Petter Bieker and is + included in Qt with the author's permission and the grateful + thanks of the Qt team. Here is the copyright statement for + the code as it was at the point of contribution. The + subsequent modifications are covered by the usual copyright for + Qt: + + \legalese + + Copyright (c) 2000 Hans Petter Bieker. All rights reserved. + + Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + are met: + + \list 1 + \o Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + \o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + \endlist + + THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND + ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + SUCH DAMAGE. + \endlegalese +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp index a366a4b..f0c1e34 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuture.cpp @@ -44,8 +44,10 @@ \brief The QFuture class represents the result of an asynchronous computation. \since 4.4 + \ingroup thread + To start a computation, use one of the APIs in the - \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. QFuture allows threads to be synchronized against one or more results which will be ready at a later point in time. The result can be of any type @@ -90,7 +92,7 @@ To interact with running tasks using signals and slots, use QFutureWatcher. - \sa QFutureWatcher, {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} + \sa QFutureWatcher, {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} */ /*! \fn QFuture::QFuture() diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp index 1fd7198..dfb693e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturesynchronizer.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,9 @@ \brief The QFutureSynchronizer class is a convenience class that simplifies QFuture synchronization. - + + \ingroup thread + QFutureSynchronizer is a template class that simplifies synchronization of one or more QFuture objects. Futures are added using the addFuture() or setFuture() functions. The futures() function returns a list of futures. @@ -63,7 +65,7 @@ You can query the status of the cancel-on-wait feature using the cancelOnWait() function. - \sa QFuture, QFutureWatcher, {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} + \sa QFuture, QFutureWatcher, {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} */ /*! diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp index f0f06f9..84715b4 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher.cpp @@ -43,9 +43,9 @@ #ifndef QT_NO_QFUTURE -#include <QEvent> -#include <QCoreApplication> -#include <QThread> +#include <QtCore/qcoreevent.h> +#include <QtCore/qcoreapplication.h> +#include <QtCore/qthread.h> #include "qfuturewatcher_p.h" @@ -55,6 +55,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \reentrant \since 4.4 + \ingroup thread + \brief The QFutureWatcher class allows monitoring a QFuture using signals and slots. @@ -94,7 +96,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE QFutureWatcher<void> as well. This is useful if only status or progress information is needed; not the actual result data. - \sa QFuture, {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} + \sa QFuture, {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} */ /*! \fn QFutureWatcher::QFutureWatcher(QObject *parent) diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher_p.h b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher_p.h index 69a28eb..8fb0e4f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qfuturewatcher_p.h @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ // #include "qfutureinterface_p.h" -#include <QList> +#include <qlist.h> #ifndef QT_NO_QFUTURE diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp index 86a099b..db33803 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qrunnable.cpp @@ -44,6 +44,8 @@ \since 4.4 \brief The QRunnable class is the base class for all runnable objects. + \ingroup thread + The QRunnable class is an interface for representing a task or piece of code that needs to be executed, represented by your reimplementation of the run() function. diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp index f4572b8..4ab0723 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentfilter.cpp @@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ /*! \headerfile <QtConcurrentFilter> \title Concurrent Filter and Filter-Reduce - \ingroup threading + \ingroup thread \brief The <QtConcurrentFilter> header provides concurrent Filter and Filter-Reduce. - These functions are a part of the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + These functions are a part of the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. The QtConcurrent::filter(), QtConcurrent::filtered() and QtConcurrent::filteredReduced() functions filter items in a sequence such diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp index 80baa8f..3fd044d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentmap.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,9 @@ possible to write multi-threaded programs without using low-level threading primitives. - See the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} section in the \l{threads.html}{threading} documentation. + See the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} chapter in + the \l{threads.html}{threading} documentation. + \inheaderfile QtCore \ingroup thread */ @@ -58,8 +60,6 @@ \brief The QtConcurrent::internal namespace contains QtConcurrent implementation details. - - \ingroup thread */ /*! @@ -78,11 +78,11 @@ /*! \headerfile <QtConcurrentMap> \title Concurrent Map and Map-Reduce - \ingroup threading + \ingroup thread \brief The <QtConcurrentMap> header provides concurrent Map and MapReduce. - These functions are a part of the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + These functions are a part of the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. The QtConcurrent::map(), QtConcurrent::mapped() and QtConcurrent::mappedReduced() functions run computations in parallel on diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp index 5803abb..989f54d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qtconcurrentrun.cpp @@ -42,11 +42,13 @@ /*! \headerfile <QtConcurrentRun> \title Asynchronous Run - + \brief The <QtConcurrentRun> header provides a way to run a function in a separate thread. + + \ingroup thread - This function is a part of the \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} framework. + This function is a part of the \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} framework. The QtConcurrent::run() function runs a function in a separate thread. The return value of the function is made available through the QFuture API. diff --git a/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp b/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp index fd1a79e..7311bea 100644 --- a/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/concurrent/qthreadpool.cpp @@ -364,6 +364,8 @@ void QThreadPoolPrivate::stealRunnable(QRunnable *runnable) \since 4.4 \threadsafe + \ingroup thread + QThreadPool manages and recyles individual QThread objects to help reduce thread creation costs in programs that use threads. Each Qt application has one global QThreadPool object, which can be accessed by calling @@ -404,7 +406,7 @@ void QThreadPoolPrivate::stealRunnable(QRunnable *runnable) Note that QThreadPool is a low-level class for managing threads, see QtConcurrent::run() or the other - \l {threads.html#qtconcurrent-intro}{Qt Concurrent} APIs for higher + \l {Concurrent Programming}{Qt Concurrent} APIs for higher level alternatives. \sa QRunnable diff --git a/src/corelib/corelib.pro b/src/corelib/corelib.pro index 96e2b5c..f835bee 100644 --- a/src/corelib/corelib.pro +++ b/src/corelib/corelib.pro @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ include(codecs/codecs.pri) include(statemachine/statemachine.pri) include(xml/xml.pri) -mac|darwin:LIBS += -framework ApplicationServices +mac|darwin:LIBS_PRIVATE += -framework ApplicationServices mac:lib_bundle:DEFINES += QT_NO_DEBUG_PLUGIN_CHECK win32:DEFINES-=QT_NO_CAST_TO_ASCII diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qendian.qdoc b/src/corelib/global/qendian.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0ef662 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/global/qendian.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \headerfile <QtEndian> + \title Endian Conversion Functions + \ingroup classlists + \brief The <QtEndian> header provides functions to convert between + little and big endian representations of numbers. +*/ + +/*! + \fn T qFromBigEndian(const uchar *src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Reads a big-endian number from memory location \a src and returns the number in the + host byte order representation. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is little-endian (such as x86) this + will swap the byte order; otherwise it will just read from \a src. + + \note Template type \c{T} can either be a qint16, qint32 or qint64. Other types of + integers, e.g., qlong, are not applicable. + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a src. + + \sa qFromLittleEndian() + \sa qToBigEndian() + \sa qToLittleEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qFromBigEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from big-endian byte order and returns the number in host byte order + representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is little-endian (such as x86) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ +/*! + \fn T qFromLittleEndian(const uchar *src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Reads a little-endian number from memory location \a src and returns the number in + the host byte order representation. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is big-endian (such as PowerPC) this + will swap the byte order; otherwise it will just read from \a src. + + \note Template type \c{T} can either be a qint16, qint32 or qint64. Other types of + integers, e.g., qlong, are not applicable. + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a src. + + \sa qFromBigEndian() + \sa qToBigEndian() + \sa qToLittleEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qFromLittleEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from little-endian byte order and returns the number in host byte + order representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is big-endian (such as PowerPC) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ +/*! + \fn void qToBigEndian(T src, uchar *dest) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Writes the number \a src with template type \c{T} to the memory location at \a dest + in big-endian byte order. + + Note that template type \c{T} can only be an integer data type (signed or unsigned). + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a dest. + + \sa qFromBigEndian() + \sa qFromLittleEndian() + \sa qToLittleEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qToBigEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from host byte order and returns the number in big-endian byte order + representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is little-endian (such as x86) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ +/*! + \fn void qToLittleEndian(T src, uchar *dest) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + + Writes the number \a src with template type \c{T} to the memory location at \a dest + in little-endian byte order. + + Note that template type \c{T} can only be an integer data type (signed or unsigned). + + There are no data alignment constraints for \a dest. + + \sa qFromBigEndian() + \sa qFromLittleEndian() + \sa qToBigEndian() +*/ +/*! + \fn T qToLittleEndian(T src) + \since 4.3 + \relates <QtEndian> + \overload + + Converts \a src from host byte order and returns the number in little-endian byte + order representation of that number. + On CPU architectures where the host byte order is big-endian (such as PowerPC) this + will return \a src with the byte order swapped; otherwise it will return \a src + unmodified. +*/ + diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp b/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp index a8c46f5..73431e0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/global/qglobal.cpp @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QFlags class provides a type-safe way of storing OR-combinations of enum values. - \mainclass + \ingroup tools The QFlags<Enum> class is a template class, where Enum is an enum @@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \headerfile <QtGlobal> \title Global Qt Declarations - \ingroup architecture + \ingroup classlists \brief The <QtGlobal> header provides basic declarations and is included by all other Qt headers. diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qglobal.h b/src/corelib/global/qglobal.h index d6ec7dd..36dd863 100644 --- a/src/corelib/global/qglobal.h +++ b/src/corelib/global/qglobal.h @@ -877,6 +877,8 @@ typedef quint64 qulonglong; && sizeof(void *) == sizeof(qptrdiff) */ template <int> struct QIntegerForSize; +template <> struct QIntegerForSize<1> { typedef quint8 Unsigned; typedef qint8 Signed; }; +template <> struct QIntegerForSize<2> { typedef quint16 Unsigned; typedef qint16 Signed; }; template <> struct QIntegerForSize<4> { typedef quint32 Unsigned; typedef qint32 Signed; }; template <> struct QIntegerForSize<8> { typedef quint64 Unsigned; typedef qint64 Signed; }; template <class T> struct QIntegerForSizeof: QIntegerForSize<sizeof(T)> { }; @@ -2004,6 +2006,14 @@ public: \ static inline const char *name() { return #TYPE; } \ } +template <typename T> +inline void qSwap(T &value1, T &value2) +{ + const T t = value1; + value1 = value2; + value2 = t; +} + /* Specialize a shared type with: @@ -2013,33 +2023,12 @@ public: \ types must declare a 'bool isDetached(void) const;' member for this to work. */ -#if (defined Q_CC_MSVC && _MSC_VER < 1300) || defined(Q_CC_MWERKS) -template <typename T> -inline void qSwap_helper(T &value1, T &value2, T*) -{ - T t = value1; - value1 = value2; - value2 = t; -} -#define Q_DECLARE_SHARED(TYPE) \ -template <> inline bool qIsDetached<TYPE>(TYPE &t) { return t.isDetached(); } \ -template <> inline void qSwap_helper<TYPE>(TYPE &value1, TYPE &value2, TYPE*) \ -{ \ - const TYPE::DataPtr t = value1.data_ptr(); \ - value1.data_ptr() = value2.data_ptr(); \ - value2.data_ptr() = t; \ -} -#else #define Q_DECLARE_SHARED(TYPE) \ template <> inline bool qIsDetached<TYPE>(TYPE &t) { return t.isDetached(); } \ -template <typename T> inline void qSwap(T &, T &); \ template <> inline void qSwap<TYPE>(TYPE &value1, TYPE &value2) \ { \ - const TYPE::DataPtr t = value1.data_ptr(); \ - value1.data_ptr() = value2.data_ptr(); \ - value2.data_ptr() = t; \ + qSwap<TYPE::DataPtr>(value1.data_ptr(), value2.data_ptr()); \ } -#endif /* QTypeInfo primitive specializations diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp b/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp index ba87340..c8cf6dc 100644 --- a/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/global/qlibraryinfo.cpp @@ -133,9 +133,6 @@ QSettings *QLibraryInfoPrivate::findConfiguration() \class QLibraryInfo \brief The QLibraryInfo class provides information about the Qt library. - \ingroup misc - \mainclass - Many pieces of information are established when Qt is configured. Installation paths, license information, and even a unique build key. This class provides an abstraction for accessing this diff --git a/src/corelib/global/qnamespace.qdoc b/src/corelib/global/qnamespace.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..319e2ce --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/global/qnamespace.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,2754 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \namespace Qt + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The Qt namespace contains miscellaneous identifiers + used throughout the Qt library. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Orientation + + This type is used to signify an object's orientation. + + \value Horizontal + \value Vertical + + Orientation is used with QScrollBar for example. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::AlignmentFlag + + This enum type is used to describe alignment. It contains + horizontal and vertical flags that can be combined to produce + the required effect. + + The \l{TextElideMode} enum can also be used in many situations + to fine-tune the appearance of aligned text. + + The horizontal flags are: + + \value AlignLeft Aligns with the left edge. + \value AlignRight Aligns with the right edge. + \value AlignHCenter Centers horizontally in the available space. + \value AlignJustify Justifies the text in the available space. + \omitvalue AlignAuto + + The vertical flags are: + + \value AlignTop Aligns with the top. + \value AlignBottom Aligns with the bottom. + \value AlignVCenter Centers vertically in the available space. + + You can use only one of the horizontal flags at a time. There is + one two-dimensional flag: + + \value AlignCenter Centers in both dimensions. + + You can use at most one horizontal and one vertical flag at a + time. Qt::AlignCenter counts as both horizontal and vertical. + + Three enum values are useful in applications that can be run in + right-to-left mode: + + \value AlignAbsolute If the widget's layout direction is + Qt::RightToLeft (instead of Qt::LeftToRight, the default), + Qt::AlignLeft refers to the \e right edge and Qt::AlignRight + to the \e left edge. This is normally the desired behavior. + If you want Qt::AlignLeft to always mean "left" and + Qt::AlignRight to always mean "right", combine the flag with + Qt::AlignAbsolute. + \value AlignLeading Synonym for Qt::AlignLeft. + \value AlignTrailing Synonym for Qt::AlignRight. + + Masks: + + \value AlignHorizontal_Mask + \value AlignVertical_Mask + + Conflicting combinations of flags have undefined meanings. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ApplicationAttribute + + This enum describes attributes that change the behavior of + application-wide features. These are enabled and disabled using + QCoreApplication::setAttribute(), and can be tested for with + QCoreApplication::testAttribute(). + + \value AA_ImmediateWidgetCreation Ensures that widgets are created + as soon as they are constructed. By default, resources for + widgets are allocated on demand to improve efficiency and + minimize resource usage. Setting or clearing this attribute + affects widgets constructed after the change. Setting it + tells Qt to create toplevel windows immediately. + Therefore, if it is important to minimize resource + consumption, do not set this attribute. + + \value AA_MSWindowsUseDirect3DByDefault This value is obsolete and + has no effect. + + \value AA_DontShowIconsInMenus Actions with the Icon property won't be + shown in any menus unless specifically set by the + QAction::iconVisibleInMenu property. + + Menus that are currently open or menus already created in the native + Mac OS X menubar \e{may not} pick up a change in this attribute. Changes + in the QAction::iconVisibleInMenu property will always be picked up. + + \value AA_NativeWindows Ensures that widgets have native windows. + + \value AA_DontCreateNativeWidgetSiblings Ensures that siblings of native + widgets stay non-native unless specifically set by the + Qt::WA_NativeWindow attribute. + + \value AA_MacPluginApplication Stops the Qt mac application from doing + specific initializations that do not necessarily make sense when using Qt + to author a plugin. This includes avoiding loading our nib for the main + menu and not taking possession of the native menu bar. When setting this + attribute to true will also set the AA_DontUseNativeMenuBar attribute + to true. + + \value AA_DontUseNativeMenuBar All menubars created while this attribute is + set to true won't be used as a native menubar (e.g, the menubar at + the top of the main screen on Mac OS X or at the bottom in Windows CE). + + \value AA_MacDontSwapCtrlAndMeta On Mac OS X by default, Qt swaps the + Control and Meta (Command) keys (i.e., whenever Control is pressed, Qt + sends Meta and whenever Meta is pressed Control is sent. When this + attribute is true, Qt will not do the flip. QKeySequence::StandardShortcuts + will also flip accordingly (i.e., QKeySequence::Copy will be + Command+C on the keyboard regardless of the value set, though what is output for + QKeySequence::toString(QKeySequence::PortableText) will be different). + + \omitvalue AA_AttributeCount +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::MouseButton + + This enum type describes the different mouse buttons. + + \value NoButton The button state does not refer to any + button (see QMouseEvent::button()). + \value LeftButton The left button is pressed, or an event refers + to the left button. (The left button may be the right button on + left-handed mice.) + \value RightButton The right button. + \value MidButton The middle button. + \value XButton1 The first X button. + \value XButton2 The second X button. + + \omitvalue MouseButtonMask + + \sa KeyboardModifier Modifier +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::KeyboardModifier + + This enum describes the modifier keys. + + \value NoModifier No modifier key is pressed. + \value ShiftModifier A Shift key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value ControlModifier A Ctrl key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value AltModifier An Alt key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value MetaModifier A Meta key on the keyboard is pressed. + \value KeypadModifier A keypad button is pressed. + \value GroupSwitchModifier X11 only. A Mode_switch key on the keyboard is pressed. + + \omitvalue KeyboardModifierMask + + \note On Mac OS X, the \c ControlModifier value corresponds to + the Command keys on the Macintosh keyboard, and the \c MetaModifier value + corresponds to the Control keys. The \c KeypadModifier value will also be set + when an arrow key is pressed as the arrow keys are considered part of the + keypad. + + \note On Windows Keyboards, Qt::MetaModifier and Qt::Key_Meta are mapped + to the Windows key. + + \sa MouseButton Modifier +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Modifier + + This enum provides shorter names for the keyboard modifier keys + supported by Qt. + + \bold{Note:} On Mac OS X, the \c CTRL value corresponds to + the Command keys on the Macintosh keyboard, and the \c META value + corresponds to the Control keys. + + \value SHIFT The Shift keys provided on all standard keyboards. + \value META The Meta keys. + \value CTRL The Ctrl keys. + \value ALT The normal Alt keys, but not keys like AltGr. + \value UNICODE_ACCEL The shortcut is specified as a Unicode code + point, not as a Qt Key. + \omitvalue MODIFIER_MASK + + \sa KeyboardModifier MouseButton +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::GlobalColor + + \raw HTML + <style type="text/css" id="colorstyles"> + #white { background-color: #ffffff; color: #000000 } + #black { background-color: #000000; color: #ffffff } + #red { background-color: #ff0000; color: #000000 } + #darkRed { background-color: #800000; color: #ffffff } + #green { background-color: #00ff00; color: #000000 } + #darkGreen { background-color: #008000; color: #ffffff } + #blue { background-color: #0000ff; color: #ffffff } + #darkBlue { background-color: #000080; color: #ffffff } + #cyan { background-color: #00ffff; color: #000000 } + #darkCyan { background-color: #008080; color: #ffffff } + #magenta { background-color: #ff00ff; color: #000000 } + #darkMagenta { background-color: #800080; color: #ffffff } + #yellow { background-color: #ffff00; color: #000000 } + #darkYellow { background-color: #808000; color: #ffffff } + #gray { background-color: #a0a0a4; color: #000000 } + #darkGray { background-color: #808080; color: #ffffff } + #lightGray { background-color: #c0c0c0; color: #000000 } + </style> + \endraw + + Qt's predefined QColor objects: + + \value white \raw HTML + White <tt id="white">(#ffffff)</tt> + \endraw + \value black \raw HTML + Black <tt id="black">(#000000)</tt> + \endraw + \value red \raw HTML + Red <tt id="red">(#ff0000)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkRed \raw HTML + Dark red <tt id="darkRed">(#800000)</tt> + \endraw + \value green \raw HTML + Green <tt id="green">(#00ff00)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkGreen \raw HTML + Dark green <tt id="darkGreen">(#008000)</tt> + \endraw + \value blue \raw HTML + Blue <tt id="blue">(#0000ff)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkBlue \raw HTML + Dark blue <tt id="darkBlue">(#000080)</tt> + \endraw + \value cyan \raw HTML + Cyan <tt id="cyan">(#00ffff)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkCyan \raw HTML + Dark cyan <tt id="darkCyan">(#008080)</tt> + \endraw + \value magenta \raw HTML + Magenta <tt id="magenta">(#ff00ff)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkMagenta \raw HTML + Dark magenta <tt id="darkMagenta">(#800080)</tt> + \endraw + \value yellow \raw HTML + Yellow <tt id="yellow">(#ffff00)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkYellow \raw HTML + Dark yellow <tt id="darkYellow">(#808000)</tt> + \endraw + \value gray \raw HTML + Gray <tt id="gray">(#a0a0a4)</tt> + \endraw + \value darkGray \raw HTML + Dark gray <tt id="darkGray">(#808080)</tt> + \endraw + \value lightGray \raw HTML + Light gray <tt id="lightGray">(#c0c0c0)</tt> + \endraw + \value transparent a transparent black value (i.e., QColor(0, 0, 0, 0)) + \value color0 0 pixel value (for bitmaps) + \value color1 1 pixel value (for bitmaps) + + \sa QColor + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PenStyle + + This enum type defines the pen styles that can be drawn using + QPainter. The styles are: + + \table + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-solid.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-dash.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-dot.png + \row + \o Qt::SolidLine + \o Qt::DashLine + \o Qt::DotLine + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-dashdot.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-dashdotdot.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-custom.png + \row + \o Qt::DashDotLine + \o Qt::DashDotDotLine + \o Qt::CustomDashLine + \endtable + + \value NoPen no line at all. For example, QPainter::drawRect() + fills but does not draw any boundary line. + + \value SolidLine A plain line. + \value DashLine Dashes separated by a few pixels. + \value DotLine Dots separated by a few pixels. + \value DashDotLine Alternate dots and dashes. + \value DashDotDotLine One dash, two dots, one dash, two dots. + \value CustomDashLine A custom pattern defined using + QPainterPathStroker::setDashPattern(). + + \omitvalue MPenStyle + + \sa QPen +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PenCapStyle + + This enum type defines the pen cap styles supported by Qt, i.e. + the line end caps that can be drawn using QPainter. + + \table + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-square.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-flat.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-roundcap.png + \row + \o Qt::SquareCap + \o Qt::FlatCap + \o Qt::RoundCap + \endtable + + \value FlatCap a square line end that does not cover the end + point of the line. + \value SquareCap a square line end that covers the end point and + extends beyond it by half the line width. + \value RoundCap a rounded line end. + \omitvalue MPenCapStyle + + \sa QPen +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PenJoinStyle + + This enum type defines the pen join styles supported by Qt, i.e. + which joins between two connected lines can be drawn using + QPainter. + + \table + \row + \o \inlineimage qpen-bevel.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-miter.png + \o \inlineimage qpen-roundjoin.png + \row + \o Qt::BevelJoin + \o Qt::MiterJoin + \o Qt::RoundJoin + \endtable + + \value MiterJoin The outer edges of the lines are extended to + meet at an angle, and this area is filled. + \value BevelJoin The triangular notch between the two lines is filled. + \value RoundJoin A circular arc between the two lines is filled. + \value SvgMiterJoin A miter join corresponding to the definition of + a miter join in the \l{SVG 1.2 Tiny} specification. + \omitvalue MPenJoinStyle + + \sa QPen +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::BrushStyle + + This enum type defines the brush styles supported by Qt, i.e. the + fill pattern of shapes drawn using QPainter. + + \image brush-styles.png Brush Styles + + \value NoBrush No brush pattern. + \value SolidPattern Uniform color. + \value Dense1Pattern Extremely dense brush pattern. + \value Dense2Pattern Very dense brush pattern. + \value Dense3Pattern Somewhat dense brush pattern. + \value Dense4Pattern Half dense brush pattern. + \value Dense5Pattern Somewhat sparse brush pattern. + \value Dense6Pattern Very sparse brush pattern. + \value Dense7Pattern Extremely sparse brush pattern. + \value HorPattern Horizontal lines. + \value VerPattern Vertical lines. + \value CrossPattern Crossing horizontal and vertical lines. + \value BDiagPattern Backward diagonal lines. + \value FDiagPattern Forward diagonal lines. + \value DiagCrossPattern Crossing diagonal lines. + \value LinearGradientPattern Linear gradient (set using a dedicated QBrush constructor). + \value ConicalGradientPattern Conical gradient (set using a dedicated QBrush constructor). + \value RadialGradientPattern Radial gradient (set using a dedicated QBrush constructor). + \value TexturePattern Custom pattern (see QBrush::setTexture()). + + \omitvalue CustomPattern + + \sa QBrush +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextFlag + + This enum type is used to define some modifier flags. Some of + these flags only make sense in the context of printing: + + \value TextSingleLine Treats all whitespace as spaces and prints just + one line. + \value TextDontClip If it's impossible to stay within the given bounds, + it prints outside. + \value TextExpandTabs Makes the U+0009 (ASCII tab) character move to + the next tab stop. + \value TextShowMnemonic Displays the string "\&P" as \underline{P} + (see QButton for an example). For an ampersand, use "\&\&". + \value TextWordWrap Breaks lines at appropriate points, e.g. at word + boundaries. + \value TextWrapAnywhere Breaks lines anywhere, even within words. + \value TextHideMnemonic Same as Qt::TextShowMnemonic but doesn't draw the underlines. + \value TextDontPrint Treat this text as "hidden" and don't print + it. + \value IncludeTrailingSpaces When this option is set, QTextLine::naturalTextWidth() and naturalTextRect() will + return a value that includes the width of trailing spaces in the text; otherwise + this width is excluded. + \value TextIncludeTrailingSpaces Same as IncludeTrailingSpaces + \value TextJustificationForced Ensures that text lines are justified. + + \omitvalue BreakAnywhere + \omitvalue DontClip + \omitvalue DontPrint + \omitvalue ExpandTabs + \omitvalue IncludeTrailingSpaces + \omitvalue NoAccel + \omitvalue ShowPrefix + \omitvalue SingleLine + \omitvalue WordBreak + \omitvalue TextForceLeftToRight + \omitvalue TextForceRightToLeft + \omitvalue TextLongestVariant Always use the longest variant when computing the size of a multi-variant string + + You can use as many modifier flags as you want, except that + Qt::TextSingleLine and Qt::TextWordWrap cannot be combined. + + Flags that are inappropriate for a given use are generally + ignored. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::BGMode + + Background mode: + + \value TransparentMode + \value OpaqueMode +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ConnectionType + + This enum describes the types of connection that can be used between signals and + slots. In particular, it determines whether a particular signal is delivered to a + slot immediately or queued for delivery at a later time. + + \value DirectConnection When emitted, the signal is immediately delivered to the slot. + \value QueuedConnection When emitted, the signal is queued until the event loop is + able to deliver it to the slot. + \value BlockingQueuedConnection + Same as QueuedConnection, except that the current thread blocks + until the slot has been delivered. This connection type should + only be used for receivers in a different thread. Note that misuse + of this type can lead to deadlocks in your application. + \value AutoConnection If the signal is emitted from the thread + in which the receiving object lives, the + slot is invoked directly, as with + Qt::DirectConnection; otherwise the + signal is queued, as with + Qt::QueuedConnection. + \value UniqueConnection Same as AutoConnection, but there will be a check that the signal is + not already connected to the same slot before connecting, otherwise, + the connection will fail. + This value was introduced in Qt 4.6. + \value AutoCompatConnection + The default connection type for signals and slots when Qt 3 support + is enabled. Equivalent to AutoConnection for connections but will cause warnings + to be output under certain circumstances. See + \l{Porting to Qt 4#Compatibility Signals and Slots}{Compatibility Signals and Slots} + for further information. + + With queued connections, the parameters must be of types that are known to + Qt's meta-object system, because Qt needs to copy the arguments to store them + in an event behind the scenes. If you try to use a queued connection and + get the error message + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qnamespace.qdoc 0 + + call qRegisterMetaType() to register the data type before you + establish the connection. + + \sa {Thread Support in Qt}, QObject::connect(), qRegisterMetaType() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DateFormat + + \value TextDate The default Qt format, which includes the day and month name, + the day number in the month, and the year in full. The day and month names will + be short, localized names. This is basically equivalent to using the date format + string, "ddd MMM d yyyy". See QDate::toString() for more information. + + \value ISODate ISO 8601 extended format: either \c{YYYY-MM-DD} for dates or + \c{YYYY-MM-DDTHH:MM:SS} for combined dates and times. + + \value SystemLocaleShortDate The \l{QLocale::ShortFormat}{short format} used + by the \l{QLocale::system()}{operating system}. + + \value SystemLocaleLongDate The \l{QLocale::LongFormat}{long format} used + by the \l{QLocale::system()}{operating system}. + + \value DefaultLocaleShortDate The \l{QLocale::ShortFormat}{short format} specified + by the \l{QLocale::setDefault()}{application's locale}. + + \value DefaultLocaleLongDate The \l{QLocale::LongFormat}{long format} used + by the \l{QLocale::setDefault()}{application's locale}. + + \value SystemLocaleDate \e{This enum value is deprecated.} Use Qt::SystemLocaleShortDate + instead (or Qt::SystemLocaleLongDate if you want long dates). + + \value LocaleDate \e{This enum value is deprecated.} Use Qt::DefaultLocaleShortDate + instead (or Qt::DefaultLocaleLongDate if you want long dates). + + \value LocalDate \e{This enum value is deprecated.} Use Qt::SystemLocaleShortDate + instead (or Qt::SystemLocaleLongDate if you want long dates). + + \note For \c ISODate formats, each \c Y, \c M and \c D represents a single digit + of the year, month and day used to specify the date. Each \c H, \c M and \c S + represents a single digit of the hour, minute and second used to specify the time. + The presence of a literal \c T character is used to separate the date and time when + both are specified. +*/ + + +/*! + \enum Qt::TimeSpec + + \value LocalTime Locale dependent time (Timezones and Daylight Savings Time). + \value UTC Coordinated Universal Time, replaces Greenwich Mean Time. + \value OffsetFromUTC An offset in seconds from Coordinated Universal Time. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DayOfWeek + + \value Monday + \value Tuesday + \value Wednesday + \value Thursday + \value Friday + \value Saturday + \value Sunday +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::CaseSensitivity + + \value CaseInsensitive + \value CaseSensitive +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ToolBarArea + + \value LeftToolBarArea + \value RightToolBarArea + \value TopToolBarArea + \value BottomToolBarArea + \value AllToolBarAreas + \value NoToolBarArea + + \omitvalue ToolBarArea_Mask +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DockWidgetArea + + \value LeftDockWidgetArea + \value RightDockWidgetArea + \value TopDockWidgetArea + \value BottomDockWidgetArea + \value AllDockWidgetAreas + \value NoDockWidgetArea + + \omitvalue DockWidgetArea_Mask +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::BackgroundMode + + \compat + + \value FixedColor + \value FixedPixmap + \value NoBackground + \value PaletteForeground + \value PaletteButton + \value PaletteLight + \value PaletteMidlight + \value PaletteDark + \value PaletteMid + \value PaletteText + \value PaletteBrightText + \value PaletteBase + \value PaletteBackground + \value PaletteShadow + \value PaletteHighlight + \value PaletteHighlightedText + \value PaletteButtonText + \value PaletteLink + \value PaletteLinkVisited + \value X11ParentRelative +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ImageConversionFlag + + The options marked "(default)" are set if no other values from + the list are included (since the defaults are zero): + + Color/Mono preference (ignored for QBitmap): + + \value AutoColor (default) - If the image has \link + QImage::depth() depth\endlink 1 and contains only + black and white pixels, the pixmap becomes monochrome. + \value ColorOnly The pixmap is dithered/converted to the + \link QPixmap::defaultDepth() native display depth\endlink. + \value MonoOnly The pixmap becomes monochrome. If necessary, + it is dithered using the chosen dithering algorithm. + + Dithering mode preference for RGB channels: + + \value DiffuseDither (default) - A high-quality dither. + \value OrderedDither A faster, more ordered dither. + \value ThresholdDither No dithering; closest color is used. + + Dithering mode preference for alpha channel: + + \value ThresholdAlphaDither (default) - No dithering. + \value OrderedAlphaDither A faster, more ordered dither. + \value DiffuseAlphaDither A high-quality dither. + \omitvalue NoAlpha + + Color matching versus dithering preference: + + \value PreferDither (default when converting to a pixmap) - Always dither + 32-bit images when the image is converted to 8 bits. + \value AvoidDither (default when converting for the purpose of saving to + file) - Dither 32-bit images only if the image has more than 256 + colors and it is being converted to 8 bits. + \omitvalue AutoDither + + \omitvalue ColorMode_Mask + \omitvalue Dither_Mask + \omitvalue AlphaDither_Mask + \omitvalue DitherMode_Mask + \omitvalue NoOpaqueDetection +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::GUIStyle + + \compat + + \value WindowsStyle + \value MotifStyle + \value MacStyle + \value Win3Style + \value PMStyle +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::UIEffect + + This enum describes the available UI effects. + + By default, Qt will try to use the platform specific desktop + settings for each effect. Use the + QApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware() function (passing \c false + as argument) to prevent this, and the + QApplication::setEffectEnabled() to enable or disable a particular + effect. + + Note that all effects are disabled on screens running at less than + 16-bit color depth. + + \omitvalue UI_General + + \value UI_AnimateMenu Show animated menus. + \value UI_FadeMenu Show faded menus. + \value UI_AnimateCombo Show animated comboboxes. + \value UI_AnimateTooltip Show tooltip animations. + \value UI_FadeTooltip Show tooltip fading effects. + \value UI_AnimateToolBox Reserved + + \sa QApplication::setEffectEnabled(), QApplication::setDesktopSettingsAware() +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::AspectRatioMode + + This enum type defines what happens to the aspect ratio when + scaling an rectangle. + + \image qimage-scaling.png + + \value IgnoreAspectRatio The size is scaled freely. The aspect + ratio is not preserved. + \value KeepAspectRatio The size is scaled to a rectangle as + large as possible inside a given + rectangle, preserving the aspect ratio. + \value KeepAspectRatioByExpanding The size is scaled to a + rectangle as small as possible + outside a given rectangle, + preserving the aspect ratio. + + \omitvalue ScaleFree + \omitvalue ScaleMin + \omitvalue ScaleMax + + \sa QSize::scale(), QImage::scaled() +*/ + +/*! \typedef Qt::ScaleMode + \compat + + Use Qt::AspectRatioMode instead. + + The enum values have been renamed as follows: + + \table + \row \i Old enum value \i New enum value + \row \i Qt::ScaleFree \i Qt::IgnoreAspectRatio + \row \i Qt::ScaleMin \i Qt::KeepAspectRatio + \row \i Qt::ScaleMax \i Qt::KeepAspectRatioByExpanding + \endtable +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::TransformationMode + + This enum type defines whether image transformations (e.g., + scaling) should be smooth or not. + + \value FastTransformation The transformation is performed + quickly, with no smoothing. + \value SmoothTransformation The resulting image is transformed + using bilinear filtering. + + \sa QImage::scaled() +*/ + +/*! \enum Qt::Axis + + This enum type defines three values to represent the three + axes in the cartesian coordinate system. + + \value XAxis The X axis. + \value YAxis The Y axis. + \value ZAxis The Z axis. + + \sa QTransform::rotate(), QTransform::rotateRadians() + */ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WidgetAttribute + + \keyword widget attributes + + This enum type is used to specify various widget attributes. + Attributes are set and cleared with QWidget::setAttribute(), and + queried with QWidget::testAttribute(), although some have special + convenience functions which are mentioned below. + + \value WA_AcceptDrops Allows data from drag and drop operations + to be dropped onto the widget (see QWidget::setAcceptDrops()). + + \value WA_AlwaysShowToolTips Enables tooltips for inactive windows. + + \value WA_ContentsPropagated This flag is superfluous and + obsolete; it no longer has any effect. Since Qt 4.1, all widgets + that do not set WA_PaintOnScreen propagate their contents. + + \value WA_CustomWhatsThis Indicates that the widget wants to + continue operating normally in "What's This?" mode. This is set by the + widget's author. + + \value WA_DeleteOnClose Makes Qt delete this widget when the + widget has accepted the close event (see QWidget::closeEvent()). + + \value WA_Disabled Indicates that the widget is disabled, i.e. + it does not receive any mouse or keyboard events. There is also a + getter functions QWidget::isEnabled(). This is set/cleared by the + Qt kernel. + + \omitvalue WA_DropSiteRegistered + \omitvalue WA_ForceAcceptDrops + + \value WA_ForceDisabled Indicates that the widget is + explicitly disabled, i.e. it will remain disabled even when all + its ancestors are set to the enabled state. This implies + WA_Disabled. This is set/cleared by QWidget::setEnabled() and + QWidget::setDisabled(). + + \value WA_ForceUpdatesDisabled Indicates that updates are + explicitly disabled for the widget; i.e. it will remain disabled + even when all its ancestors are set to the updates-enabled state. + This implies WA_UpdatesDisabled. This is set/cleared by + QWidget::setUpdatesEnabled(). + + \value WA_GroupLeader + \e{This attribute has been deprecated.} Use QWidget::windowModality + instead. + + \value WA_Hover Forces Qt to generate paint events when the mouse + enters or leaves the widget. This feature is typically used when + implementing custom styles; see the \l{widgets/styles}{Styles} + example for details. + + \value WA_InputMethodEnabled Enables input methods for Asian languages. + Must be set when creating custom text editing widgets. + On Windows CE this flag can be used in addition to + QApplication::autoSipEnabled to automatically display the SIP when + entering a widget. + + \value WA_KeyboardFocusChange Set on a toplevel window when + the users changes focus with the keyboard (tab, backtab, or shortcut). + + \value WA_KeyCompression Enables key event compression if set, + and disables it if not set. By default key compression is off, so + widgets receive one key press event for each key press (or more, + since autorepeat is usually on). If you turn it on and your + program doesn't keep up with key input, Qt may try to compress key + events so that more than one character can be processed in each + event. + For example, a word processor widget might receive 2, 3 or more + characters in each QKeyEvent::text(), if the layout recalculation + takes too long for the CPU. + If a widget supports multiple character unicode input, it is + always safe to turn the compression on. + Qt performs key event compression only for printable characters. + Qt::Modifier keys, cursor movement keys, function keys and + miscellaneous action keys (e.g. Escape, Enter, Backspace, + PrintScreen) will stop key event compression, even if there are + more compressible key events available. + Platforms other than Mac and X11 do not support this compression, + in which case turning it on will have no effect. + This is set/cleared by the widget's author. + + \value WA_LayoutOnEntireRect Indicates that the widget + wants QLayout to operate on the entire QWidget::rect(), not only + on QWidget::contentsRect(). This is set by the widget's author. + + \value WA_LayoutUsesWidgetRect Ignore the layout item rect from the style + when laying out this widget with QLayout. This makes a difference in + QMacStyle and QPlastiqueStyle for some widgets. + + \value WA_MacNoClickThrough When a widget that has this attribute set + is clicked, and its window is inactive, the click will make the window + active but won't be seen by the widget. Typical use of this attribute + is on widgets with "destructive" actions, such as a "Delete" button. + WA_MacNoClickThrough also applies to all child widgets of the widget + that has it set. + + \value WA_MacOpaqueSizeGrip Indicates that the native Carbon size grip + should be opaque instead of transparent (the default). This attribute + is only applicable to Mac OS X and is set by the widget's author. + + \value WA_MacShowFocusRect Indicates that this widget should get a + QFocusFrame around it. Some widgets draw their own focus halo + regardless of this attribute. Not that the QWidget::focusPolicy + also plays the main role in whether something is given focus or + not, this only controls whether or not this gets the focus + frame. This attribute is only applicable to Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacNormalSize Indicates the widget should have the + normal size for widgets in Mac OS X. This attribute is only + applicable to Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacSmallSize Indicates the widget should have the small + size for widgets in Mac OS X. This attribute is only applicable to + Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacMiniSize Indicates the widget should have the mini + size for widgets in Mac OS X. This attribute is only applicable to + Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacVariableSize Indicates the widget can choose between + alternative sizes for widgets to avoid clipping. + This attribute is only applicable to Mac OS X. + + \value WA_MacBrushedMetal Indicates the widget should be drawn in + the brushed metal style as supported by the windowing system. This + attribute is only applicable to Mac OS X. + + \omitvalue WA_MacMetalStyle + + \value WA_Mapped Indicates that the widget is mapped on screen. + This is set/cleared by the Qt kernel. + + \value WA_MouseNoMask Makes the widget receive mouse events for + the entire widget regardless of the currently set mask, + overriding QWidget::setMask(). This is not applicable for + top-level windows. + + \value WA_MouseTracking Indicates that the widget has mouse + tracking enabled. See QWidget::mouseTracking. + + \value WA_Moved Indicates that the widget has an explicit + position. This is set/cleared by QWidget::move() and + by QWidget::setGeometry(). + + \value WA_MSWindowsUseDirect3D This value is obsolete and has no + effect. + + \value WA_NoBackground This value is obsolete. Use + WA_OpaquePaintEvent instead. + + \value WA_NoChildEventsForParent Indicates that the widget does + not want ChildAdded or ChildRemoved events sent to its + parent. This is rarely necessary but can help to avoid automatic + insertion widgets like splitters and layouts. This is set by a + widget's author. + + \value WA_NoChildEventsFromChildren Indicates that the widget does + not want to receive ChildAdded or ChildRemoved events sent from its + children. This is set by a widget's author. + + \value WA_NoMouseReplay Used for pop-up widgets. Indicates that the most + recent mouse press event should not be replayed when the pop-up widget + closes. The flag is set by the widget's author and cleared by the Qt kernel + every time the widget receives a new mouse event. + + \value WA_NoMousePropagation Prohibits mouse events from being propagated + to the widget's parent. This attribute is disabled by default. + + \value WA_TransparentForMouseEvents When enabled, this attribute disables + the delivery of mouse events to the widget and its children. Mouse events + are delivered to other widgets as if the widget and its children were not + present in the widget hierarchy; mouse clicks and other events effectively + "pass through" them. This attribute is disabled by default. + + \value WA_NoSystemBackground Indicates that the widget has no background, + i.e. when the widget receives paint events, the background is not + automatically repainted. \note Unlike WA_OpaquePaintEvent, newly exposed + areas are \bold never filled with the background (e.g., after showing a + window for the first time the user can see "through" it until the + application processes the paint events). This flag is set or cleared by the + widget's author. + + \value WA_OpaquePaintEvent Indicates that the widget paints all its pixels + when it receives a paint event. Thus, it is not required for operations + like updating, resizing, scrolling and focus changes to erase the widget + before generating paint events. The use of WA_OpaquePaintEvent provides a + small optimization by helping to reduce flicker on systems that do not + support double buffering and avoiding computational cycles necessary to + erase the background prior to painting. \note Unlike + WA_NoSystemBackground, WA_OpaquePaintEvent makes an effort to avoid + transparent window backgrounds. This flag is set or cleared by the widget's + author. + + \value WA_OutsideWSRange Indicates that the widget is outside + the valid range of the window system's coordinate system. A widget + outside the valid range cannot be mapped on screen. This is + set/cleared by the Qt kernel. + + \value WA_PaintOnScreen Indicates that the widget wants to draw directly + onto the screen. Widgets with this attribute set do not participate in + composition management, i.e. they cannot be semi-transparent or shine + through semi-transparent overlapping widgets. \note This flag is only + supported on X11 and it disables double buffering. On Qt for Embedded + Linux, the flag only works when set on a top-level widget and it relies on + support from the active screen driver. This flag is set or cleared by the + widget's author. To render outside of Qt's paint system, e.g., if you + require native painting primitives, you need to reimplement + QWidget::paintEngine() to return 0 and set this flag. + + \value WA_PaintOutsidePaintEvent Makes it possible to use QPainter to + paint on the widget outside \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()}. This + flag is not supported on Windows, Mac OS X or Embedded Linux. We recommend + that you use it only when porting Qt 3 code to Qt 4. + + \value WA_PaintUnclipped Makes all painters operating on this widget + unclipped. Children of this widget or other widgets in front of it do not + clip the area the painter can paint on. This flag is only supported for + widgets with the WA_PaintOnScreen flag set. The preferred way to do this in + a cross platform way is to create a transparent widget that lies in front + of the other widgets. + + \value WA_PendingMoveEvent Indicates that a move event is pending, e.g., + when a hidden widget was moved. This flag is set or cleared by the Qt + kernel. + + \value WA_PendingResizeEvent Indicates that a resize event is pending, + e.g., when a hidden widget was resized. This flag is set or cleared by the + Qt kernel. + + \value WA_QuitOnClose Makes Qt quit the application when the last widget + with the attribute set has accepted closeEvent(). This behavior can be + modified with the QApplication::quitOnLastWindowClosed property. By default + this attribute is set for all widgets of type Qt::Window. + + \value WA_Resized Indicates that the widget has an explicit size. This flag + is set or cleared by QWidget::resize() and QWidget::setGeometry(). + + \value WA_RightToLeft Indicates that the layout direction for the widget + is right to left. + + \value WA_SetCursor Indicates that the widget has a cursor of its own. This + flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setCursor() and QWidget::unsetCursor(). + + \value WA_SetFont Indicates that the widget has a font of its own. This + flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setFont(). + + \value WA_SetPalette Indicates that the widget has a palette of its own. + This flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setPalette(). + + \value WA_SetStyle Indicates that the widget has a style of its own. This + flag is set or cleared by QWidget::setStyle(). + + \value WA_ShowModal \e{This attribute has been deprecated.} Use + QWidget::windowModality instead. + + \value WA_StaticContents Indicates that the widget contents are north-west + aligned and static. On resize, such a widget will receive paint events only + for parts of itself that are newly visible. This flag is set or cleared by + the widget's author. + + \value WA_StyleSheet Indicates that the widget is styled using a + \l{Qt Style Sheets}{style sheet}. + + \value WA_TranslucentBackground Indicates that the widget should have a + translucent background, i.e., any non-opaque regions of the widgets will be + translucent because the widget will have an alpha channel. Setting this + flag causes WA_NoSystemBackground to be set. On Windows the + widget also needs the Qt::FramelessWindowHint window flag to be set. + This flag is set or cleared by the widget's author. + + \value WA_UnderMouse Indicates that the widget is under the mouse cursor. + The value is not updated correctly during drag and drop operations. There + is also a getter function, QWidget::underMouse(). This flag is set or + cleared by the Qt kernel. + + \value WA_UpdatesDisabled Indicates that updates are blocked (including the + system background). This flag is set or cleared by the Qt kernel. + \warning This flag must \e never be set or cleared by the widget's author. + + \value WA_WindowModified Indicates that the window is marked as modified. + On some platforms this flag will do nothing, on others (including Mac OS X + and Windows) the window will take a modified appearance. This flag is set + or cleared by QWidget::setWindowModified(). + + \value WA_WindowPropagation Makes a toplevel window inherit font and + palette from its parent. + + \value WA_MacAlwaysShowToolWindow On Mac OS X, show the tool window even + when the application is not active. By default, all tool windows are + hidden when the application is inactive. + + \value WA_SetLocale Indicates the locale should be taken into consideration + in the widget. + + \value WA_StyledBackground Indicates the widget should be drawn using a + styled background. + + \value WA_ShowWithoutActivating Show the widget without making it active. + + \value WA_NativeWindow Indicates that a native window is created for the + widget. Enabling this flag will also force a native window for the widget's + ancestors unless Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors is set. + + \value WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors Indicates that the widget's ancestors + are kept non-native even though the widget itself is native. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDesktop Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DESKTOP to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDock Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DOCK to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeToolBar Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_TOOLBAR to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automaticaly sets this + attribute for QToolBar. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeMenu Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_MENU to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for QMenu when torn-off. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeUtility Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_UTILITY to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the Qt::Tool window type. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeSplash Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_SPLASH to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the Qt::SplashScreen window type. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDialog Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DIALOG + to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This + attribute has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets + this attribute for the Qt::Dialog and Qt::Sheet window types. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDropDownMenu Adds + _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DROPDOWN_MENU to the window's + _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This + attribute has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt + automatically sets this attribute for QMenus added to a QMenuBar. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypePopupMenu Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_POPUP_MENU + to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for QMenu. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeToolTip Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_TOOLTIP to the + window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the Qt::ToolTip window type. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeNotification Adds + _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_NOTIFICATION to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 + window property. See http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more + details. This attribute has no effect on non-X11 platforms. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeCombo Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_COMBO + to the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute for the QComboBox pop-up. + + \value WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDND Adds _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE_DND to + the window's _NET_WM_WINDOW_TYPE X11 window property. See + http://standards.freedesktop.org/wm-spec/ for more details. This attribute + has no effect on non-X11 platforms. \note Qt automatically sets this + attribute on the feedback widget used during a drag. + + \value WA_MacFrameworkScaled Enables resolution independence aware mode + on Mac when using Carbon. This attribute has no effect on Cocoa. + The attribute is off by default and can be enabled on a per-window basis. + + \value WA_AcceptTouchEvents Allows touch events (see QTouchEvent) + to be sent to the widget. Must be set on all widgets that can + handle touch events. Without this attribute set, events from a + touch device will be sent as mouse events. + + \value WA_TouchPadAcceptSingleTouchEvents Allows touchpad single + touch events to be sent to the widget. + + \omitvalue WA_SetLayoutDirection + \omitvalue WA_InputMethodTransparent + \omitvalue WA_WState_CompressKeys + \omitvalue WA_WState_ConfigPending + \omitvalue WA_WState_Created + \omitvalue WA_WState_DND + \omitvalue WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide + \omitvalue WA_WState_Hidden + \omitvalue WA_WState_InPaintEvent + \omitvalue WA_WState_OwnSizePolicy + \omitvalue WA_WState_Polished + \omitvalue WA_WState_Reparented + \omitvalue WA_WState_Visible + \omitvalue WA_SetWindowIcon + \omitvalue WA_PendingUpdate + \omitvalue WA_LaidOut + \omitvalue WA_GrabbedShortcut + \omitvalue WA_DontShowOnScreen + \omitvalue WA_InvalidSize + \omitvalue WA_ForceUpdatesDisabled + \omitvalue WA_NoX11EventCompression + \omitvalue WA_TintedBackground + \omitvalue WA_X11OpenGLOverlay + \omitvalue WA_CanHostQMdiSubWindowTitleBar + \omitvalue WA_AttributeCount + \omitvalue WA_StyleSheet + \omitvalue WA_X11BypassTransientForHint + \omitvalue WA_SetWindowModality + \omitvalue WA_WState_WindowOpacitySet + \omitvalue WA_WState_AcceptedTouchBeginEvent +*/ + +/*! \typedef Qt::HANDLE + + Platform-specific handle type for system objects. This is + equivalent to \c{void *} on Mac OS X and embedded Linux, + and to \c{unsigned long} on X11. On Windows it is the + DWORD returned by the Win32 function getCurrentThreadId(). + + \warning Using this type is not portable. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Key + + The key names used by Qt. + + \value Key_Escape + \value Key_Tab + \value Key_Backtab + \omitvalue Key_BackTab + \value Key_Backspace + \omitvalue Key_BackSpace + \value Key_Return + \value Key_Enter Typically located on the keypad. + \value Key_Insert + \value Key_Delete + \value Key_Pause + \value Key_Print + \value Key_SysReq + \value Key_Clear + \value Key_Home + \value Key_End + \value Key_Left + \value Key_Up + \value Key_Right + \value Key_Down + \value Key_PageUp + \omitvalue Key_Prior + \value Key_PageDown + \omitvalue Key_Next + \value Key_Shift + \value Key_Control On Mac OS X, this corresponds to the Command keys. + \value Key_Meta On Mac OS X, this corresponds to the Control keys. + On Windows keyboards, this key is mapped to the + Windows key. + \value Key_Alt + \value Key_AltGr On Windows, when the KeyDown event for this key is + sent, the Ctrl+Alt modifiers are also set. + \value Key_CapsLock + \value Key_NumLock + \value Key_ScrollLock + \value Key_F1 + \value Key_F2 + \value Key_F3 + \value Key_F4 + \value Key_F5 + \value Key_F6 + \value Key_F7 + \value Key_F8 + \value Key_F9 + \value Key_F10 + \value Key_F11 + \value Key_F12 + \value Key_F13 + \value Key_F14 + \value Key_F15 + \value Key_F16 + \value Key_F17 + \value Key_F18 + \value Key_F19 + \value Key_F20 + \value Key_F21 + \value Key_F22 + \value Key_F23 + \value Key_F24 + \value Key_F25 + \value Key_F26 + \value Key_F27 + \value Key_F28 + \value Key_F29 + \value Key_F30 + \value Key_F31 + \value Key_F32 + \value Key_F33 + \value Key_F34 + \value Key_F35 + \value Key_Super_L + \value Key_Super_R + \value Key_Menu + \value Key_Hyper_L + \value Key_Hyper_R + \value Key_Help + \value Key_Direction_L + \value Key_Direction_R + \value Key_Space + \value Key_Any + \value Key_Exclam + \value Key_QuoteDbl + \value Key_NumberSign + \value Key_Dollar + \value Key_Percent + \value Key_Ampersand + \value Key_Apostrophe + \value Key_ParenLeft + \value Key_ParenRight + \value Key_Asterisk + \value Key_Plus + \value Key_Comma + \value Key_Minus + \value Key_Period + \value Key_Slash + \value Key_0 + \value Key_1 + \value Key_2 + \value Key_3 + \value Key_4 + \value Key_5 + \value Key_6 + \value Key_7 + \value Key_8 + \value Key_9 + \value Key_Colon + \value Key_Semicolon + \value Key_Less + \value Key_Equal + \value Key_Greater + \value Key_Question + \value Key_At + \value Key_A + \value Key_B + \value Key_C + \value Key_D + \value Key_E + \value Key_F + \value Key_G + \value Key_H + \value Key_I + \value Key_J + \value Key_K + \value Key_L + \value Key_M + \value Key_N + \value Key_O + \value Key_P + \value Key_Q + \value Key_R + \value Key_S + \value Key_T + \value Key_U + \value Key_V + \value Key_W + \value Key_X + \value Key_Y + \value Key_Z + \value Key_BracketLeft + \value Key_Backslash + \value Key_BracketRight + \value Key_AsciiCircum + \value Key_Underscore + \value Key_QuoteLeft + \value Key_BraceLeft + \value Key_Bar + \value Key_BraceRight + \value Key_AsciiTilde + \value Key_nobreakspace + \value Key_exclamdown + \value Key_cent + \value Key_sterling + \value Key_currency + \value Key_yen + \value Key_brokenbar + \value Key_section + \value Key_diaeresis + \value Key_copyright + \value Key_ordfeminine + \value Key_guillemotleft + \value Key_notsign + \value Key_hyphen + \value Key_registered + \value Key_macron + \value Key_degree + \value Key_plusminus + \value Key_twosuperior + \value Key_threesuperior + \value Key_acute + \value Key_mu + \value Key_paragraph + \value Key_periodcentered + \value Key_cedilla + \value Key_onesuperior + \value Key_masculine + \value Key_guillemotright + \value Key_onequarter + \value Key_onehalf + \value Key_threequarters + \value Key_questiondown + \value Key_Agrave + \value Key_Aacute + \value Key_Acircumflex + \value Key_Atilde + \value Key_Adiaeresis + \value Key_Aring + \value Key_AE + \value Key_Ccedilla + \value Key_Egrave + \value Key_Eacute + \value Key_Ecircumflex + \value Key_Ediaeresis + \value Key_Igrave + \value Key_Iacute + \value Key_Icircumflex + \value Key_Idiaeresis + \value Key_ETH + \value Key_Ntilde + \value Key_Ograve + \value Key_Oacute + \value Key_Ocircumflex + \value Key_Otilde + \value Key_Odiaeresis + \value Key_multiply + \value Key_Ooblique + \value Key_Ugrave + \value Key_Uacute + \value Key_Ucircumflex + \value Key_Udiaeresis + \value Key_Yacute + \value Key_THORN + \value Key_ssharp + \omitvalue Key_agrave + \omitvalue Key_aacute + \omitvalue Key_acircumflex + \omitvalue Key_atilde + \omitvalue Key_adiaeresis + \omitvalue Key_aring + \omitvalue Key_ae + \omitvalue Key_ccedilla + \omitvalue Key_egrave + \omitvalue Key_eacute + \omitvalue Key_ecircumflex + \omitvalue Key_ediaeresis + \omitvalue Key_igrave + \omitvalue Key_iacute + \omitvalue Key_icircumflex + \omitvalue Key_idiaeresis + \omitvalue Key_eth + \omitvalue Key_ntilde + \omitvalue Key_ograve + \omitvalue Key_oacute + \omitvalue Key_ocircumflex + \omitvalue Key_otilde + \omitvalue Key_odiaeresis + \value Key_division + \omitvalue Key_oslash + \omitvalue Key_ugrave + \omitvalue Key_uacute + \omitvalue Key_ucircumflex + \omitvalue Key_udiaeresis + \omitvalue Key_yacute + \omitvalue Key_thorn + \value Key_ydiaeresis + \value Key_Multi_key + \value Key_Codeinput + \value Key_SingleCandidate + \value Key_MultipleCandidate + \value Key_PreviousCandidate + \value Key_Mode_switch + \value Key_Kanji + \value Key_Muhenkan + \value Key_Henkan + \value Key_Romaji + \value Key_Hiragana + \value Key_Katakana + \value Key_Hiragana_Katakana + \value Key_Zenkaku + \value Key_Hankaku + \value Key_Zenkaku_Hankaku + \value Key_Touroku + \value Key_Massyo + \value Key_Kana_Lock + \value Key_Kana_Shift + \value Key_Eisu_Shift + \value Key_Eisu_toggle + \value Key_Hangul + \value Key_Hangul_Start + \value Key_Hangul_End + \value Key_Hangul_Hanja + \value Key_Hangul_Jamo + \value Key_Hangul_Romaja + \value Key_Hangul_Jeonja + \value Key_Hangul_Banja + \value Key_Hangul_PreHanja + \value Key_Hangul_PostHanja + \value Key_Hangul_Special + \value Key_Dead_Grave + \value Key_Dead_Acute + \value Key_Dead_Circumflex + \value Key_Dead_Tilde + \value Key_Dead_Macron + \value Key_Dead_Breve + \value Key_Dead_Abovedot + \value Key_Dead_Diaeresis + \value Key_Dead_Abovering + \value Key_Dead_Doubleacute + \value Key_Dead_Caron + \value Key_Dead_Cedilla + \value Key_Dead_Ogonek + \value Key_Dead_Iota + \value Key_Dead_Voiced_Sound + \value Key_Dead_Semivoiced_Sound + \value Key_Dead_Belowdot + \value Key_Dead_Hook + \value Key_Dead_Horn + \value Key_Back + \value Key_Forward + \value Key_Stop + \value Key_Refresh + \value Key_VolumeDown + \value Key_VolumeMute + \value Key_VolumeUp + \value Key_BassBoost + \value Key_BassUp + \value Key_BassDown + \value Key_TrebleUp + \value Key_TrebleDown + \value Key_MediaPlay + \value Key_MediaStop + \value Key_MediaPrevious + \omitvalue Key_MediaPrev + \value Key_MediaNext + \value Key_MediaRecord + \value Key_HomePage + \value Key_Favorites + \value Key_Search + \value Key_Standby + \value Key_OpenUrl + \value Key_LaunchMail + \value Key_LaunchMedia + \value Key_Launch0 + \value Key_Launch1 + \value Key_Launch2 + \value Key_Launch3 + \value Key_Launch4 + \value Key_Launch5 + \value Key_Launch6 + \value Key_Launch7 + \value Key_Launch8 + \value Key_Launch9 + \value Key_LaunchA + \value Key_LaunchB + \value Key_LaunchC + \value Key_LaunchD + \value Key_LaunchE + \value Key_LaunchF + \value Key_MediaLast + \value Key_unknown + + \value Key_Call + \value Key_Context1 + \value Key_Context2 + \value Key_Context3 + \value Key_Context4 + \value Key_Flip + \value Key_Hangup + \value Key_No + \value Key_Select + \value Key_Yes + + \value Key_Execute + \value Key_Printer + \value Key_Play + \value Key_Sleep + \value Key_Zoom + \value Key_Cancel + + \sa QKeyEvent::key() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::HitTestAccuracy + + This enum contains the types of accuracy that can be used by the + QTextDocument class when testing for mouse clicks on text documents. + + \value ExactHit The point at which input occurred must coincide + exactly with input-sensitive parts of the document. + \value FuzzyHit The point at which input occurred can lie close to + input-sensitive parts of the document. + + This enum is defined in the \c <QTextDocument> header file. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WhiteSpaceMode + + This enum describes the types of whitespace mode that are used by + the QTextDocument class to meet the requirements of different kinds + of textual information. + + \value WhiteSpaceNormal The whitespace mode used to display + normal word wrapped text in paragraphs. + \value WhiteSpacePre A preformatted text mode in which + whitespace is reproduced exactly. + \value WhiteSpaceNoWrap + + \omitvalue WhiteSpaceModeUndefined + + This enum is defined in the \c <QTextDocument> header file. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ButtonState_enum + \compat + \value ShiftButton + \value ControlButton + \value AltButton + \value MetaButton + \value Keypad + \value KeyButtonMask + + Use Qt::KeyboardModifier instead. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Qt::ButtonState + \compat + + Use Qt::KeyboardModifier instead. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::CheckState + + This enum describes the state of checkable items, controls, and widgets. + + \value Unchecked The item is unchecked. + \value PartiallyChecked The item is partially checked. Items in hierarchical models + may be partially checked if some, but not all, of their + children are checked. + \value Checked The item is checked. + + \sa QCheckBox, Qt::ItemFlags, Qt::ItemDataRole +*/ + + +/*! + \enum Qt::ToolButtonStyle + + The style of the tool button, describing how the button's text and + icon should be displayed. + + \value ToolButtonIconOnly Only display the icon. + \value ToolButtonTextOnly Only display the text. + \value ToolButtonTextBesideIcon The text appears beside the icon. + \value ToolButtonTextUnderIcon The text appears under the icon. + \value ToolButtonFollowStyle Follow the \l{QStyle::SH_ToolButtonStyle}{style}. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Corner + + This enum type specifies a corner in a rectangle: + + \value TopLeftCorner The top-left corner of the rectangle. + \value TopRightCorner The top-right corner of the rectangle. + \value BottomLeftCorner The bottom-left corner of the rectangle. + \value BottomRightCorner The bottom-right corner of the rectangle. + + \omitvalue TopLeft + \omitvalue TopRight + \omitvalue BottomLeft + \omitvalue BottomRight +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ScrollBarPolicy + + This enum type describes the various modes of QAbstractScrollArea's scroll + bars. + + \value ScrollBarAsNeeded QAbstractScrollArea shows a scroll bar when the + content is too large to fit and not otherwise. This is the + default. + + \value ScrollBarAlwaysOff QAbstractScrollArea never shows a scroll bar. + + \value ScrollBarAlwaysOn QAbstractScrollArea always shows a scroll bar. + + (The modes for the horizontal and vertical scroll bars are + independent.) +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ArrowType + + \value NoArrow + \value UpArrow + \value DownArrow + \value LeftArrow + \value RightArrow +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::FocusReason + + This enum specifies why the focus changed. It will be passed + through QWidget::setFocus and can be retrieved in the QFocusEvent + sent to the widget upon focus change. + + \value MouseFocusReason A mouse action occurred. + \value TabFocusReason The Tab key was pressed. + \value BacktabFocusReason A Backtab occurred. The input for this may + include the Shift or Control keys; + e.g. Shift+Tab. + \value ActiveWindowFocusReason The window system made this window either + active or inactive. + \value PopupFocusReason The application opened/closed a pop-up that + grabbed/released the keyboard focus. + \value ShortcutFocusReason The user typed a label's buddy shortcut + \value MenuBarFocusReason The menu bar took focus. + \value OtherFocusReason Another reason, usually application-specific. + + \omitvalue NoFocusReason + + \sa {Keyboard Focus} +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowState + + \keyword window state + + This enum type is used to specify the current state of a top-level + window. + + The states are + + \value WindowNoState The window has no state set (in normal state). + \value WindowMinimized The window is minimized (i.e. iconified). + \value WindowMaximized The window is maximized with a frame around it. + \value WindowFullScreen The window fills the entire screen without any frame around it. + \value WindowActive The window is the active window, i.e. it has keyboard focus. + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ContextMenuPolicy + + This enum type defines the various policies a widget can have with + respect to showing a context menu. + + \value NoContextMenu the widget does not feature a context menu, + context menu handling is deferred to the widget's parent. + \value PreventContextMenu the widget does not feature a context + menu, and in contrast to \c NoContextMenu, the handling is \e not + deferred to the widget's parent. This means that all right mouse + button events are guaranteed to be delivered to the widget itself + through mousePressEvent(), and mouseReleaseEvent(). + \value DefaultContextMenu the widget's QWidget::contextMenuEvent() handler is called. + \value ActionsContextMenu the widget displays its QWidget::actions() as context menu. + \value CustomContextMenu the widget emits the QWidget::customContextMenuRequested() signal. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::FocusPolicy + + This enum type defines the various policies a widget can have with + respect to acquiring keyboard focus. + + \value TabFocus the widget accepts focus by tabbing. + \value ClickFocus the widget accepts focus by clicking. + \value StrongFocus the widget accepts focus by both tabbing + and clicking. On Mac OS X this will also + be indicate that the widget accepts tab focus + when in 'Text/List focus mode'. + \value WheelFocus like Qt::StrongFocus plus the widget accepts + focus by using the mouse wheel. + \value NoFocus the widget does not accept focus. + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ShortcutContext + + For a QEvent::Shortcut event to occur, the shortcut's key sequence + must be entered by the user in a context where the shortcut is + active. The possible contexts are these: + + \value WidgetShortcut The shortcut is active when its + parent widget has focus. + \value WidgetWithChildrenShortcut The shortcut is active + when its parent widget, or any of its children has focus. + Children which are top-level widgets, except pop-ups, are + not affected by this shortcut context. + \value WindowShortcut The shortcut is active when its + parent widget is a logical subwidget of the + active top-level window. + \value ApplicationShortcut The shortcut is active when one of + the applications windows are active. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Qt::WFlags + + Synonym for Qt::WindowFlags. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowType + + \keyword window flag + + This enum type is used to specify various window-system properties + for the widget. They are fairly unusual but necessary in a few + cases. Some of these flags depend on whether the underlying window + manager supports them. + + The main types are + + \value Widget This is the default type for QWidget. Widgets of + this type are child widgets if they have a parent, + and independent windows if they have no parent. + See also Qt::Window and Qt::SubWindow. + + \value Window Indicates that the widget is a window, usually + with a window system frame and a title bar, + irrespective of whether the widget has a parent or + not. Note that it is not possible to unset this + flag if the widget does not have a parent. + + \value Dialog Indicates that the widget is a window that should + be decorated as a dialog (i.e., typically no + maximize or minimize buttons in the title bar). + This is the default type for QDialog. If you want + to use it as a modal dialog, it should be launched + from another window, or have a parent and used + with the QWidget::windowModality property. If you make + it modal, the dialog will prevent other top-level + windows in the application from getting any input. + We refer to a top-level window that has a parent + as a \e secondary window. + + \value Sheet Indicates that the window is a Macintosh sheet. Since + using a sheet implies window modality, the recommended + way is to use QWidget::setWindowModality(), or + QDialog::open(), instead. + + \value Drawer Indicates that the widget is a Macintosh drawer. + + \value Popup Indicates that the widget is a pop-up top-level + window, i.e. that it is modal, but has a window + system frame appropriate for pop-up menus. + + \value Tool Indicates that the widget is a tool window. A tool + window is often a small window with a smaller than + usual title bar and decoration, typically used for + collections of tool buttons. It there is a parent, + the tool window will always be kept on top of it. + If there isn't a parent, you may consider using + Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint as well. If the window + system supports it, a tool window can be decorated + with a somewhat lighter frame. It can also be + combined with Qt::FramelessWindowHint. + \br + \br + On Mac OS X, tool windows correspond to the + \l{http://developer.apple.com/documentation/Carbon/Conceptual/HandlingWindowsControls/hitb-wind_cont_concept/chapter_2_section_2.html}{Floating} + class of windows. This means that the window lives on a + level above normal windows; it impossible to put a normal + window on top of it. By default, tool windows will disappear + when the application is inactive. This can be controlled by + the Qt::WA_MacAlwaysShowToolWindow attribute. + + \value ToolTip Indicates that the widget is a tooltip. This is + used internally to implement + \l{QWidget::toolTip}{tooltips}. + + \value SplashScreen Indicates that the window is a splash screen. + This is the default type for QSplashScreen. + + \value Desktop Indicates that this widget is the desktop. This + is the type for QDesktopWidget. + + \value SubWindow Indicates that this widget is a sub-window, such + as a QMdiSubWindow widget. + + There are also a number of flags which you can use to customize + the appearance of top-level windows. These have no effect on other + windows: + + \value MSWindowsFixedSizeDialogHint Gives the window a thin dialog border on Windows. + This style is traditionally used for fixed-size dialogs. + + \value MSWindowsOwnDC Gives the window its own display + context on Windows. + + \value X11BypassWindowManagerHint Bypass the window + manager completely. This results in a borderless window + that is not managed at all (i.e., no keyboard input unless + you call QWidget::activateWindow() manually). + + \value FramelessWindowHint Produces a borderless window. + The user cannot move or resize a borderless window via the window + system. On X11, the result of the flag is dependent on the window manager and its + ability to understand Motif and/or NETWM hints. Most existing + modern window managers can handle this. + + The \c CustomizeWindowHint flag is used to enable customization of + the window controls. This flag must be set to allow the \c + WindowTitleHint, \c WindowSystemMenuHint, \c + WindowMinimizeButtonHint, \c WindowMaximizeButtonHint and \c + WindowCloseButtonHint flags to be changed. + + \value CustomizeWindowHint Turns off the default window title hints. + + \value WindowTitleHint Gives the window a title bar. + + \value WindowSystemMenuHint Adds a window system menu, and + possibly a close button (for example on Mac). If you need to hide + or show a close button, it is more portable to use \c + WindowCloseButtonHint. + + \value WindowMinimizeButtonHint Adds a minimize button. On + some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value WindowMaximizeButtonHint Adds a maximize button. On + some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value WindowMinMaxButtonsHint Adds a minimize and a maximize + button. On some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value WindowCloseButtonHint Adds a close button. On + some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it + to work. + + \value WindowContextHelpButtonHint Adds a context help button to dialogs. + On some platforms this implies Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint for it to work. + + \value MacWindowToolBarButtonHint On Mac OS X adds a tool bar button (i.e., + the oblong button that is on the top right of windows that have toolbars. + + \value BypassGraphicsProxyWidget Prevents the window and its children from + automatically embedding themselves into a QGraphicsProxyWidget if the + parent widget is already embedded. You can set this flag if you + want your widget to always be a toplevel widget on the desktop, + regardless of whether the parent widget is embedded in a scene or + not. + + \value WindowShadeButtonHint + + \value WindowStaysOnTopHint Informs the window system that the + window should stay on top of all other windows. Note that + on some window managers on X11 you also have to pass + Qt::X11BypassWindowManagerHint for this flag to work + correctly. + + \value WindowStaysOnBottomHint Informs the window system that the + window should stay on bottom of all other windows. Note + that on X11 this hint will work only in window managers + that support _NET_WM_STATE_BELOW atom. If a window always + on the bottom has a parent, the parent will also be left on + the bottom. This window hint is currently not implemented + for Mac OS X. + + \value WindowOkButtonHint Adds an OK button to the window decoration of a dialog. + Only supported for Windows CE. + + \value WindowCancelButtonHint Adds a Cancel button to the window decoration of a dialog. + Only supported for Windows CE. + + \value WindowType_Mask A mask for extracting the window type + part of the window flags. + + Obsolete flags: + + \value WMouseNoMask Use Qt::WA_MouseNoMask instead. + \value WDestructiveClose Use Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose instead. + \value WStaticContents Use Qt::WA_StaticContents instead. + \value WGroupLeader No longer needed. + \value WShowModal Use QWidget::windowModality instead. + \value WNoMousePropagation Use Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation instead. + \value WType_TopLevel Use Qt::Window instead. + \value WType_Dialog Use Qt::Dialog instead. + \value WType_Popup Use Qt::Popup instead. + \value WType_Desktop Use Qt::Desktop instead. + \value WType_Mask Use Qt::WindowType_Mask instead. + + \value WStyle_Customize No longer needed. + \value WStyle_NormalBorder No longer needed. + \value WStyle_DialogBorder Use Qt::MSWindowsFixedSizeDialogHint instead. + \value WStyle_NoBorder Use Qt::FramelessWindowHint instead. + \value WStyle_Title Use Qt::WindowTitleHint instead. + \value WStyle_SysMenu Use Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint instead. + \value WStyle_Minimize Use Qt::WindowMinimizeButtonHint instead. + \value WStyle_Maximize Use Qt::WindowMaximizeButtonHint instead. + \value WStyle_MinMax Use Qt::WindowMinMaxButtonsHint instead. + \value WStyle_Tool Use Qt::Tool instead. + \value WStyle_StaysOnTop Use Qt::WindowStaysOnTopHint instead. + \value WStyle_ContextHelp Use Qt::WindowContextHelpButtonHint instead. + + \value WPaintDesktop No longer needed. + \value WPaintClever No longer needed. + + \value WX11BypassWM Use Qt::X11BypassWindowManagerHint instead. + \value WWinOwnDC Use Qt::MSWindowsOwnDC instead. + \value WMacSheet Use Qt::Sheet instead. + \value WMacDrawer Use Qt::Drawer instead. + + \value WStyle_Splash Use Qt::SplashScreen instead. + + \value WNoAutoErase No longer needed. + \value WRepaintNoErase No longer needed. + \value WNorthWestGravity Use Qt::WA_StaticContents instead. + \value WType_Modal Use Qt::Dialog and QWidget::windowModality instead. + \value WStyle_Dialog Use Qt::Dialog instead. + \value WStyle_NoBorderEx Use Qt::FramelessWindowHint instead. + \value WResizeNoErase No longer needed. + \value WMacNoSheet No longer needed. + + \sa QWidget::windowFlags, {Window Flags Example} +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DropAction + + \value CopyAction Copy the data to the target. + \value MoveAction Move the data from the source to the target. + \value LinkAction Create a link from the source to the target. + \value ActionMask + \value IgnoreAction Ignore the action (do nothing with the data). + \value TargetMoveAction On Windows, this value is used when the ownership of the D&D data + should be taken over by the target application, + i.e., the source application should not delete + the data. + \br + On X11 this value is used to do a move. + \br + TargetMoveAction is not used on the Mac. +*/ + +#if defined(Q_OS_WIN) && defined(QT3_SUPPORT) +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowsVersion + \compat + + \value WV_32s + \value WV_95 + \value WV_98 + \value WV_Me + \value WV_DOS_based + \value WV_NT + \value WV_2000 + \value WV_XP + \value WV_2003 + \value WV_NT_based + \value WV_CE + \value WV_CENET + \value WV_CE_based + \value WV_CE_5 + \value WV_CE_6 +*/ +#endif + +#if defined(Q_OS_MAC) && defined(QT3_SUPPORT) +/*! + \enum Qt::MacintoshVersion + \compat + + \value MV_Unknown Use QSysInfo::MV_Unknown instead. + \value MV_9 Use QSysInfo::MV_9 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_0 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_0 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_1 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_1 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_2 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_2 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_3 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_3 instead. + \value MV_10_DOT_4 Use QSysInfo::MV_10_4 instead. + + \value MV_CHEETAH Use QSysInfo::MV_10_0 instead. + \value MV_PUMA Use QSysInfo::MV_10_1 instead. + \value MV_JAGUAR Use QSysInfo::MV_10_2 instead. + \value MV_PANTHER Use QSysInfo::MV_10_3 instead. + \value MV_TIGER Use QSysInfo::MV_10_4 instead. + + \sa QSysInfo::MacVersion +*/ +#endif + +/*! \typedef Qt::ToolBarDock + \compat + + Use Qt::Dock instead. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Dock + \compat + + Each dock window can be in one of the following positions: + + \value DockUnmanaged not managed by a Q3MainWindow. + + \value DockTornOff the dock window floats as its own top level + window which always stays on top of the main window. + + \value DockTop above the central widget, below the menu bar. + + \value DockBottom below the central widget, above the status bar. + + \value DockRight to the right of the central widget. + + \value DockLeft to the left of the central widget. + + \value DockMinimized the dock window is not shown (this is + effectively a 'hidden' dock area); the handles of all minimized + dock windows are drawn in one row below the menu bar. + + \omitvalue Bottom + \omitvalue Left + \omitvalue Minimized + \omitvalue Right + \omitvalue Top + \omitvalue TornOff + \omitvalue Unmanaged +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::AnchorAttribute + + An anchor has one or more of the following attributes: + + \value AnchorName the name attribute of the anchor. This attribute is + used when scrolling to an anchor in the document. + + \value AnchorHref the href attribute of the anchor. This attribute is + used when a link is clicked to determine what content to load. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::SortOrder + + This enum describes how the items in a widget are sorted. + + \value AscendingOrder The items are sorted ascending e.g. starts with + 'AAA' ends with 'ZZZ' in Latin-1 locales + + \value DescendingOrder The items are sorted descending e.g. starts with + 'ZZZ' ends with 'AAA' in Latin-1 locales + + \omitvalue Ascending + \omitvalue Descending +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ClipOperation + + \value NoClip This operation turns clipping off. + + \value ReplaceClip Replaces the current clip path/rect/region with + the one supplied in the function call. + + \value IntersectClip Intersects the current clip path/rect/region + with the one supplied in the function call. + + \value UniteClip Unites the current clip path/rect/region with the + one supplied in the function call. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ItemSelectionMode + + This enum is used in QGraphicsItem, QGraphicsScene and QGraphicsView to + specify how items are selected, or how to determine if a shapes and items + collide. + + \value ContainsItemShape The output list contains only items whose + \l{QGraphicsItem::shape()}{shape} is fully contained inside the + selection area. Items that intersect with the area's outline are + not included. + + \value IntersectsItemShape The output list contains both items whose + \l{QGraphicsItem::shape()}{shape} is fully contained inside the + selection area, and items that intersect with the area's + outline. This is a common mode for rubber band selection. + + \value ContainsItemBoundingRect The output list contains only items whose + \l{QGraphicsItem::boundingRect()}{bounding rectangle} is fully + contained inside the selection area. Items that intersect with the + area's outline are not included. + + \value IntersectsItemBoundingRect The output list contains both items + whose \l{QGraphicsItem::boundingRect()}{bounding rectangle} is + fully contained inside the selection area, and items that intersect + with the area's outline. This method is commonly used for + determining areas that need redrawing. + + \sa QGraphicsScene::items(), QGraphicsScene::collidingItems(), + QGraphicsView::items(), QGraphicsItem::collidesWithItem(), + QGraphicsItem::collidesWithPath() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::FillRule + + Specifies which method should be used to fill the paths and polygons. + + \value OddEvenFill Specifies that the region is filled using the + odd even fill rule. With this rule, we determine whether a point + is inside the shape by using the following method. + Draw a horizontal line from the point to a location outside the shape, + and count the number of intersections. If the number of intersections + is an odd number, the point is inside the shape. This mode is the + default. + + \value WindingFill Specifies that the region is filled using the + non zero winding rule. With this rule, we determine whether a + point is inside the shape by using the following method. + Draw a horizontal line from the point to a location outside the shape. + Determine whether the direction of the line at each intersection point + is up or down. The winding number is determined by summing the + direction of each intersection. If the number is non zero, the point + is inside the shape. This fill mode can also in most cases be considered + as the intersection of closed shapes. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::PaintUnit + + \compat + + \value PixelUnit + \value LoMetricUnit Obsolete + \value HiMetricUnit Obsolete + \value LoEnglishUnit Obsolete + \value HiEnglishUnit Obsolete + \value TwipsUnit Obsolete +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextFormat + + This enum is used in widgets that can display both plain text and + rich text, e.g. QLabel. It is used for deciding whether a text + string should be interpreted as one or the other. This is normally + done by passing one of the enum values to a setTextFormat() + function. + + \value PlainText The text string is interpreted as a plain text + string. + + \value RichText The text string is interpreted as a rich text + string. + + \value AutoText The text string is interpreted as for + Qt::RichText if Qt::mightBeRichText() returns true, otherwise + as Qt::PlainText. + + \value LogText A special, limited text format which is only used + by Q3TextEdit in an optimized mode. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::CursorShape + + This enum type defines the various cursors that can be used. + + The standard arrow cursor is the default for widgets in a normal state. + + \value ArrowCursor \inlineimage cursor-arrow.png + The standard arrow cursor. + \value UpArrowCursor \inlineimage cursor-uparrow.png + An arrow pointing upwards toward the top of the screen. + \value CrossCursor \inlineimage cursor-cross.png + A crosshair cursor, typically used to help the + user accurately select a point on the screen. + \value WaitCursor \inlineimage cursor-wait.png + An hourglass or watch cursor, usually shown during + operations that prevent the user from interacting with + the application. + \value IBeamCursor \inlineimage cursor-ibeam.png + A caret or ibeam cursor, indicating that a widget can + accept and display text input. + \value SizeVerCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizev.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to vertically + resize top-level windows. + \value SizeHorCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizeh.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to horizontally + resize top-level windows. + \value SizeBDiagCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizeb.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to diagonally + resize top-level windows at their top-right and + bottom-left corners. + \value SizeFDiagCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizef.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to diagonally + resize top-level windows at their top-left and + bottom-right corners. + \value SizeAllCursor \inlineimage cursor-sizeall.png + A cursor used for elements that are used to resize + top-level windows in any direction. + \value BlankCursor A blank/invisible cursor, typically used when the cursor + shape needs to be hidden. + \value SplitVCursor \inlineimage cursor-vsplit.png + A cursor used for vertical splitters, indicating that + a handle can be dragged horizontally to adjust the use + of available space. + \value SplitHCursor \inlineimage cursor-hsplit.png + A cursor used for horizontal splitters, indicating that + a handle can be dragged vertically to adjust the use + of available space. + \value PointingHandCursor \inlineimage cursor-hand.png + A pointing hand cursor that is typically used for + clickable elements such as hyperlinks. + \value ForbiddenCursor \inlineimage cursor-forbidden.png + A slashed circle cursor, typically used during drag + and drop operations to indicate that dragged content + cannot be dropped on particular widgets or inside + certain regions. + \value OpenHandCursor \inlineimage cursor-openhand.png + A cursor representing an open hand, typically used to + indicate that the area under the cursor is the visible + part of a canvas that the user can click and drag in + order to scroll around. + \value ClosedHandCursor \inlineimage cursor-closedhand.png + A cursor representing a closed hand, typically used to + indicate that a dragging operation is in progress that + involves scrolling. + \value WhatsThisCursor \inlineimage cursor-whatsthis.png + An arrow with a question mark, typically used to indicate + the presence of What's This? help for a widget. + \value BusyCursor \inlineimage cursor-wait.png + An hourglass or watch cursor, usually shown during + operations that allow the user to interact with + the application while they are performed in the + background. + \value BitmapCursor + \omitvalue LastCursor + \omitvalue CustomCursor + + \omitvalue arrowCursor + \omitvalue upArrowCursor + \omitvalue crossCursor + \omitvalue waitCursor + \omitvalue ibeamCursor + \omitvalue sizeVerCursor + \omitvalue sizeHorCursor + \omitvalue sizeBDiagCursor + \omitvalue sizeFDiagCursor + \omitvalue sizeAllCursor + \omitvalue blankCursor + \omitvalue splitVCursor + \omitvalue splitHCursor + \omitvalue pointingHandCursor + \omitvalue forbiddenCursor + \omitvalue whatsThisCursor +*/ + +/*! + \typedef Qt::TextFlags + \compat + + Use Qt::TextFlag instead. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::LayoutDirection + + Specifies the direction of Qt's layouts: + + \value LeftToRight Left-to-right layout. + \value RightToLeft Right-to-left layout. + + Right-to-left layouts are necessary for certain languages, + notably Arabic and Hebrew. + + \sa QApplication::setLayoutDirection(), QWidget::setLayoutDirection() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::InputMethodHint + + \value ImhNone No hints. + \value ImhHiddenText Characters should be hidden, as is typically used when entering passwords. + This is automatically set when setting QLineEdit::echoMode to \c Password. + \value ImhNumbersOnly Only number input is allowed. + \value ImhUppercaseOnly Only upper case letter input is allowed. + \value ImhLowercaseOnly Only lower case letter input is allowed. + \value ImhNoAutoUppercase The input method should not try to automatically switch to upper case + when a sentence ends. + \value ImhPreferNumbers Numbers are preferred (but not required). + \value ImhPreferUppercase Upper case letters are preferred (but not required). + \value ImhPreferLowercase Lower case letters are preferred (but not required). + \value ImhNoPredictiveText Do not use predictive text (i.e. dictionary lookup) while typing. + \value ImhDialableCharactersOnly Only characters suitable for phone dialling are allowed. + + \note If several flags ending with \c Only are ORed together, the resulting character set will + consist of the union of the specified sets. For instance specifying \c ImhNumbersOnly and + \c ImhUppercaseOnly would yield a set consisting of numbers and uppercase letters. + + \sa QGraphicsItem::inputMethodHints() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::InputMethodQuery + + \value ImMicroFocus The rectangle covering the area of the input cursor in widget coordinates. + \value ImFont The currently used font for text input. + \value ImCursorPosition The logical position of the cursor within the text surrounding the input area (see \c ImSurroundingText). + \value ImSurroundingText The plain text around the input area, for example the current paragraph. + \value ImCurrentSelection The currently selected text. + \value ImMaximumTextLength The maximum number of characters that the widget can hold. If there is no limit, QVariant() is returned. + \value ImAnchorPosition The position of the selection anchor. This may be less or greater than \c ImCursorPosition, depending on which side of selection the cursor is. If there is no selection, it returns the same as \c ImCursorPosition. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ItemDataRole + + Each item in the model has a set of data elements associated with + it, each with its own role. The roles are used by the view to indicate + to the model which type of data it needs. Custom models should return + data in these types. + + The general purpose roles (and the associated types) are: + + \value DisplayRole The key data to be rendered in the form of text. (QString) + \value DecorationRole The data to be rendered as a decoration in the form + of an icon. (QColor) + \value EditRole The data in a form suitable for editing in an + editor. (QString) + \value ToolTipRole The data displayed in the item's tooltip. (QString) + \value StatusTipRole The data displayed in the status bar. (QString) + \value WhatsThisRole The data displayed for the item in "What's This?" + mode. (QString) + \value SizeHintRole The size hint for the item that will be supplied + to views. (QSize) + + Roles describing appearance and meta data (with associated types): + + \value FontRole The font used for items rendered with the default + delegate. (QFont) + \value TextAlignmentRole The alignment of the text for items rendered with the + default delegate. (Qt::AlignmentFlag) + \value BackgroundRole The background brush used for items rendered with + the default delegate. (QBrush) + \value BackgroundColorRole This role is obsolete. Use BackgroundRole instead. + \value ForegroundRole The foreground brush (text color, typically) + used for items rendered with the default delegate. + (QBrush) + \value TextColorRole This role is obsolete. Use ForegroundRole instead. + \value CheckStateRole This role is used to obtain the checked state of + an item. (Qt::CheckState) + + Accessibility roles (with associated types): + + \value AccessibleTextRole The text to be used by accessibility + extensions and plugins, such as screen + readers. (QString) + \value AccessibleDescriptionRole A description of the item for accessibility + purposes. (QString) + + User roles: + + \value UserRole The first role that can be used for application-specific purposes. + + \omitvalue DisplayPropertyRole + \omitvalue DecorationPropertyRole + \omitvalue ToolTipPropertyRole + \omitvalue StatusTipPropertyRole + \omitvalue WhatsThisPropertyRole + + For user roles, it is up to the developer to decide which types to use and ensure that + components use the correct types when accessing and setting data. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ItemFlag + + This enum describes the properties of an item: + + \value NoItemFlags It does not have any properties set. + \value ItemIsSelectable It can be selected. + \value ItemIsEditable It can be edited. + \value ItemIsDragEnabled It can be dragged. + \value ItemIsDropEnabled It can be used as a drop target. + \value ItemIsUserCheckable It can be checked or unchecked by the user. + \value ItemIsEnabled The user can interact with the item. + \value ItemIsTristate The item is checkable with three separate states. + + Note that checkable items need to be given both a suitable set of flags + and an initial state, indicating whether the item is checked or not. + This is handled automatically for model/view components, but needs + to be explicitly set for instances of QListWidgetItem, QTableWidgetItem, + and QTreeWidgetItem. + + \sa QAbstractItemModel +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::MatchFlag + + This enum describes the type of matches that can be used when searching + for items in a model. + + \value MatchExactly Performs QVariant-based matching. + \value MatchFixedString Performs string-based matching. + String-based comparisons are case-insensitive unless the + \c MatchCaseSensitive flag is also specified. + \value MatchContains The search term is contained in the item. + \value MatchStartsWith The search term matches the start of the item. + \value MatchEndsWith The search term matches the end of the item. + \value MatchCaseSensitive The search is case sensitive. + \value MatchRegExp Performs string-based matching using a regular + expression as the search term. + \value MatchWildcard Performs string-based matching using a string with + wildcards as the search term. + \value MatchWrap Perform a search that wraps around, so that when + the search reaches the last item in the model, it begins again at + the first item and continues until all items have been examined. + \value MatchRecursive Searches the entire hierarchy. + + \sa QString::compare(), QRegExp +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextElideMode + + This enum specifies where the ellipsis should appear when + displaying texts that don't fit: + + \value ElideLeft The ellipsis should appear at the beginning of the text. + \value ElideRight The ellipsis should appear at the end of the text. + \value ElideMiddle The ellipsis should appear in the middle of the text. + \value ElideNone Ellipsis should NOT appear in the text. + + Qt::ElideMiddle is normally the most appropriate choice for URLs (e.g., + "\l{http://qt.nokia.com/careers/movingto/brisbane/}{http://qt.nok...ovingto/brisbane/}"), + whereas Qt::ElideRight is appropriate + for other strings (e.g., + "\l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/qq/qq09-mac-deployment.html}{Deploying Applications on Ma...}"). + + \sa QAbstractItemView::textElideMode, QFontMetrics::elidedText(), AlignmentFlag QTabBar::elideMode +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowModality + + \keyword modal + + This enum specifies the behavior of a modal window. A modal window + is one that blocks input to other windows. Note that windows that + are children of a modal window are not blocked. + + The values are: + \value NonModal The window is not modal and does not block input to other windows. + \value WindowModal The window is modal to a single window hierarchy and blocks input to its parent window, all grandparent windows, and all siblings of its parent and grandparent windows. + \value ApplicationModal The window is modal to the application and blocks input to all windows. + + \sa QWidget::windowModality, QDialog +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TextInteractionFlag + + This enum specifies how a text displaying widget reacts to user input. + + \value NoTextInteraction No interaction with the text is possible. + \value TextSelectableByMouse Text can be selected with the mouse and copied to the clipboard using + a context menu or standard keyboard shortcuts. + \value TextSelectableByKeyboard Text can be selected with the cursor keys on the keyboard. A text cursor is shown. + \value LinksAccessibleByMouse Links can be highlighted and activated with the mouse. + \value LinksAccessibleByKeyboard Links can be focused using tab and activated with enter. + \value TextEditable The text is fully editable. + + \value TextEditorInteraction The default for a text editor. + \value TextBrowserInteraction The default for QTextBrowser. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::MaskMode + + This enum specifies the behavior of the + QPixmap::createMaskFromColor() and QImage::createMaskFromColor() + functions. + + \value MaskInColor Creates a mask where all pixels matching the given color are opaque. + \value MaskOutColor Creates a mask where all pixels matching the given color are transparent. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::DockWidgetAreaSizes + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::ToolBarAreaSizes + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::EventPriority + + This enum can be used to specify event priorities. + + \value HighEventPriority Events with this priority are sent before + events with NormalEventPriority or LowEventPriority. + + \value NormalEventPriority Events with this priority are sent + after events with HighEventPriority, but before events with + LowEventPriority. + + \value LowEventPriority Events with this priority are sent after + events with HighEventPriority or NormalEventPriority. + + Note that these values are provided purely for convenience, since + event priorities can be any value between \c INT_MAX and \c + INT_MIN, inclusive. For example, you can define custom priorities + as being relative to each other: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qnamespace.qdoc 1 + + \sa QCoreApplication::postEvent() +*/ +/*! + \enum Qt::SizeHint + \since 4.4 + + This enum is used by QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint() + + \value MinimumSize is used to specify the minimum size of a graphics layout item. + \value PreferredSize is used to specify the preferred size of a graphics layout item. + \value MaximumSize is used to specify the maximum size of a graphics layout item. + \value MinimumDescent is used to specify the minimum descent of a text string in a graphics layout item. + \omitvalue NSizeHints + + \sa QGraphicsLayoutItem::sizeHint() +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::SizeMode + \since 4.4 + + This enum is used by QPainter::drawRoundedRect() and QPainterPath::addRoundedRect() + functions to specify the radii of rectangle corners with respect to the dimensions + of the bounding rectangles specified. + + \value AbsoluteSize Specifies the size using absolute measurements. + \value RelativeSize Specifies the size relative to the bounding rectangle, + typically using percentage measurements. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::WindowFrameSection + \since 4.4 + + This enum is used to describe parts of a window frame. It is returned by + QGraphicsWidget::windowFrameSectionAt() to describe what section of the window + frame is under the mouse. + + \value NoSection + \value LeftSection + \value TopLeftSection + \value TopSection + \value TopRightSection + \value RightSection + \value BottomRightSection + \value BottomSection + \value BottomLeftSection + \value TitleBarArea + + \sa QGraphicsWidget::windowFrameEvent() + \sa QGraphicsWidget::paintWindowFrame() + \sa QGraphicsWidget::windowFrameSectionAt() + +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::TileRule + \since 4.6 + + This enum describes how to repeat or stretch the parts of an image + when drawing. + + \value Stretch Scale the image to fit to the available area. + + \value Repeat Tile the image until there is no more space. May crop + the last image. + + \value Round Like Repeat, but scales the images down to ensure that + the last image is not cropped. +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::Initialization + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \enum Qt::GestureState + \since 4.6 + + This enum type describes the state of a gesture. + + \value NoGesture Initial state + \value GestureStarted A continuous gesture has started. + \value GestureUpdated A gesture continues. + \value GestureFinished A gesture has finished. + + \sa QGesture +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp index 572b8a1..52902d0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qdatastream.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE to a QIODevice. \ingroup io - \mainclass + A data stream is a binary stream of encoded information which is 100% independent of the host computer's operating system, CPU or diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp index 6dd2640..1545082 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qdebug.cpp @@ -52,8 +52,7 @@ /*! \class QDebug - \ingroup io - \mainclass + \brief The QDebug class provides an output stream for debugging information. QDebug is used whenever the developer needs to write out debugging or tracing diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp index 8eb1ce7..91d41f1 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qdir.cpp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ #include "qvarlengtharray.h" -#include "../kernel/qcoreglobaldata_p.h" +#include "private/qcoreglobaldata_p.h" #include <stdlib.h> QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ void QDirPrivate::detach(bool createFileEngine) \ingroup io \ingroup shared \reentrant - \mainclass + A QDir is used to manipulate path names, access information regarding paths and files, and manipulate the underlying file diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp index 69f1ff5..5e1a5e7 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qfile.cpp @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ QFilePrivate::setError(QFile::FileError err, int errNum) \brief The QFile class provides an interface for reading from and writing to files. \ingroup io - \mainclass + \reentrant QFile is an I/O device for reading and writing text and binary diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qfileinfo_p.h b/src/corelib/io/qfileinfo_p.h index d64a5c4..d92090c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qfileinfo_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/io/qfileinfo_p.h @@ -81,11 +81,11 @@ public: CachedSize =0x08 }; struct Data { inline Data() - : ref(1), fileEngine(0), cache_enabled(1) + : ref(1), fileEngine(0), cache_enabled(1), fileSize(0) { clear(); } inline Data(const Data ©) : ref(1), fileEngine(QAbstractFileEngine::create(copy.fileName)), - fileName(copy.fileName), cache_enabled(copy.cache_enabled) + fileName(copy.fileName), cache_enabled(copy.cache_enabled), fileSize(copy.fileSize) { clear(); } inline ~Data() { delete fileEngine; } inline void clearFlags() { diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qfilesystemwatcher_fsevents_p.h b/src/corelib/io/qfilesystemwatcher_fsevents_p.h index b93d711..317c149 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qfilesystemwatcher_fsevents_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/io/qfilesystemwatcher_fsevents_p.h @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ #include <QtCore/qmutex.h> #include <QtCore/qwaitcondition.h> #include <QtCore/qthread.h> -#include <QtCore/QHash> -#include <QtCore/QLinkedList> +#include <QtCore/qhash.h> +#include <QtCore/qlinkedlist.h> #include <private/qcore_mac_p.h> #include <sys/stat.h> diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qfsfileengine_win.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qfsfileengine_win.cpp index b7f4e48..e01b42b 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qfsfileengine_win.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qfsfileengine_win.cpp @@ -107,24 +107,15 @@ typedef DWORD (WINAPI *PtrGetNamedSecurityInfoW)(LPWSTR, SE_OBJECT_TYPE, SECURIT static PtrGetNamedSecurityInfoW ptrGetNamedSecurityInfoW = 0; typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrLookupAccountSidW)(LPCWSTR, PSID, LPWSTR, LPDWORD, LPWSTR, LPDWORD, PSID_NAME_USE); static PtrLookupAccountSidW ptrLookupAccountSidW = 0; -typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrAllocateAndInitializeSid)(PSID_IDENTIFIER_AUTHORITY, BYTE, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, PSID*); -static PtrAllocateAndInitializeSid ptrAllocateAndInitializeSid = 0; typedef VOID (WINAPI *PtrBuildTrusteeWithSidW)(PTRUSTEE_W, PSID); static PtrBuildTrusteeWithSidW ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW = 0; -typedef VOID (WINAPI *PtrBuildTrusteeWithNameW)(PTRUSTEE_W, unsigned short*); -static PtrBuildTrusteeWithNameW ptrBuildTrusteeWithNameW = 0; typedef DWORD (WINAPI *PtrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW)(PACL, PTRUSTEE_W, OUT PACCESS_MASK); static PtrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW ptrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW = 0; -typedef PVOID (WINAPI *PtrFreeSid)(PSID); -static PtrFreeSid ptrFreeSid = 0; static TRUSTEE_W currentUserTrusteeW; +static TRUSTEE_W worldTrusteeW; -typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrOpenProcessToken)(HANDLE, DWORD, PHANDLE ); -static PtrOpenProcessToken ptrOpenProcessToken = 0; typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrGetUserProfileDirectoryW)(HANDLE, LPWSTR, LPDWORD); static PtrGetUserProfileDirectoryW ptrGetUserProfileDirectoryW = 0; -typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrSetFilePointerEx)(HANDLE, LARGE_INTEGER, PLARGE_INTEGER, DWORD); -static PtrSetFilePointerEx ptrSetFilePointerEx = 0; QT_END_INCLUDE_NAMESPACE @@ -152,67 +143,37 @@ void QFSFileEnginePrivate::resolveLibs() if (advapiHnd) { ptrGetNamedSecurityInfoW = (PtrGetNamedSecurityInfoW)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "GetNamedSecurityInfoW"); ptrLookupAccountSidW = (PtrLookupAccountSidW)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "LookupAccountSidW"); - ptrAllocateAndInitializeSid = (PtrAllocateAndInitializeSid)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "AllocateAndInitializeSid"); ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW = (PtrBuildTrusteeWithSidW)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "BuildTrusteeWithSidW"); - ptrBuildTrusteeWithNameW = (PtrBuildTrusteeWithNameW)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "BuildTrusteeWithNameW"); ptrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW = (PtrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "GetEffectiveRightsFromAclW"); - ptrFreeSid = (PtrFreeSid)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "FreeSid"); } - if (ptrBuildTrusteeWithNameW) { - HINSTANCE versionHnd = LoadLibraryW(L"version"); - if (versionHnd) { - typedef DWORD (WINAPI *PtrGetFileVersionInfoSizeW)(LPCWSTR lptstrFilename,LPDWORD lpdwHandle); - PtrGetFileVersionInfoSizeW ptrGetFileVersionInfoSizeW = (PtrGetFileVersionInfoSizeW)GetProcAddress(versionHnd, "GetFileVersionInfoSizeW"); - typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrGetFileVersionInfoW)(LPCWSTR lptstrFilename,DWORD dwHandle,DWORD dwLen,LPVOID lpData); - PtrGetFileVersionInfoW ptrGetFileVersionInfoW = (PtrGetFileVersionInfoW)GetProcAddress(versionHnd, "GetFileVersionInfoW"); - typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrVerQueryValueW)(const LPVOID pBlock,LPCWSTR lpSubBlock,LPVOID *lplpBuffer,PUINT puLen); - PtrVerQueryValueW ptrVerQueryValueW = (PtrVerQueryValueW)GetProcAddress(versionHnd, "VerQueryValueW"); - if(ptrGetFileVersionInfoSizeW && ptrGetFileVersionInfoW && ptrVerQueryValueW) { - DWORD fakeHandle; - DWORD versionSize = ptrGetFileVersionInfoSizeW(L"secur32.dll", &fakeHandle); - if(versionSize) { - LPVOID versionData; - versionData = malloc(versionSize); - if(ptrGetFileVersionInfoW(L"secur32.dll", 0, versionSize, versionData)) { - UINT puLen; - VS_FIXEDFILEINFO *pLocalInfo; - if(ptrVerQueryValueW(versionData, L"\\", (void**)&pLocalInfo, &puLen)) { - WORD wVer1, wVer2, wVer3, wVer4; - wVer1 = HIWORD(pLocalInfo->dwFileVersionMS); - wVer2 = LOWORD(pLocalInfo->dwFileVersionMS); - wVer3 = HIWORD(pLocalInfo->dwFileVersionLS); - wVer4 = LOWORD(pLocalInfo->dwFileVersionLS); - // It will not work with secur32.dll version 5.0.2195.2862 - if(!(wVer1 == 5 && wVer2 == 0 && wVer3 == 2195 && (wVer4 == 2862 || wVer4 == 4587))) { - HINSTANCE userHnd = LoadLibraryW(L"secur32"); - if (userHnd) { - typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrGetUserNameExW)(EXTENDED_NAME_FORMAT nameFormat, ushort* lpBuffer, LPDWORD nSize); - PtrGetUserNameExW ptrGetUserNameExW = (PtrGetUserNameExW)GetProcAddress(userHnd, "GetUserNameExW"); - if(ptrGetUserNameExW) { - static wchar_t buffer[258]; - DWORD bufferSize = 257; - ptrGetUserNameExW(NameSamCompatible, (ushort*)buffer, &bufferSize); - ptrBuildTrusteeWithNameW(¤tUserTrusteeW, (ushort*)buffer); - } - FreeLibrary(userHnd); - } - } - } - } - free(versionData); - } - } - FreeLibrary(versionHnd); + if (ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW) { + // Create TRUSTEE for current user + HANDLE hnd = ::GetCurrentProcess(); + HANDLE token = 0; + if (::OpenProcessToken(hnd, TOKEN_QUERY, &token)) { + TOKEN_USER tu; + DWORD retsize; + if (::GetTokenInformation(token, TokenUser, &tu, sizeof(tu), &retsize)) + ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW(¤tUserTrusteeW, tu.User.Sid); + ::CloseHandle(token); } - ptrOpenProcessToken = (PtrOpenProcessToken)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "OpenProcessToken"); - HINSTANCE userenvHnd = LoadLibraryW(L"userenv"); - if (userenvHnd) { - ptrGetUserProfileDirectoryW = (PtrGetUserProfileDirectoryW)GetProcAddress(userenvHnd, "GetUserProfileDirectoryW"); + + typedef BOOL (WINAPI *PtrAllocateAndInitializeSid)(PSID_IDENTIFIER_AUTHORITY, BYTE, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, DWORD, PSID*); + PtrAllocateAndInitializeSid ptrAllocateAndInitializeSid = (PtrAllocateAndInitializeSid)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "AllocateAndInitializeSid"); + typedef PVOID (WINAPI *PtrFreeSid)(PSID); + PtrFreeSid ptrFreeSid = (PtrFreeSid)GetProcAddress(advapiHnd, "FreeSid"); + if (ptrAllocateAndInitializeSid && ptrFreeSid) { + // Create TRUSTEE for Everyone (World) + SID_IDENTIFIER_AUTHORITY worldAuth = { SECURITY_WORLD_SID_AUTHORITY }; + PSID pWorld = 0; + if (ptrAllocateAndInitializeSid(&worldAuth, 1, SECURITY_WORLD_RID, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, &pWorld)) + ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW(&worldTrusteeW, pWorld); + ptrFreeSid(pWorld); } - HINSTANCE kernelHnd = LoadLibraryW(L"kernel32"); - if (kernelHnd) - ptrSetFilePointerEx = (PtrSetFilePointerEx)GetProcAddress(kernelHnd, "SetFilePointerEx"); } + HINSTANCE userenvHnd = LoadLibraryW(L"userenv"); + if (userenvHnd) + ptrGetUserProfileDirectoryW = (PtrGetUserProfileDirectoryW)GetProcAddress(userenvHnd, "GetUserProfileDirectoryW"); #endif } } @@ -596,34 +557,27 @@ qint64 QFSFileEnginePrivate::nativePos() const if (fileHandle == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) return 0; -#if !defined(QT_NO_LIBRARY) && !defined(Q_OS_WINCE) - QFSFileEnginePrivate::resolveLibs(); - if (!ptrSetFilePointerEx) { -#endif - LARGE_INTEGER filepos; - filepos.HighPart = 0; - DWORD newFilePointer = SetFilePointer(fileHandle, 0, &filepos.HighPart, FILE_CURRENT); - if (newFilePointer == 0xFFFFFFFF && GetLastError() != NO_ERROR) { - thatQ->setError(QFile::UnspecifiedError, qt_error_string()); - return 0; - } - - // Note: This is the case for MOC, UIC, qmake and other - // bootstrapped tools, and for Windows CE. - filepos.LowPart = newFilePointer; - return filepos.QuadPart; -#if !defined(QT_NO_LIBRARY) && !defined(Q_OS_WINCE) - } - +#if !defined(Q_OS_WINCE) LARGE_INTEGER currentFilePos; LARGE_INTEGER offset; offset.QuadPart = 0; - if (!ptrSetFilePointerEx(fileHandle, offset, ¤tFilePos, FILE_CURRENT)) { + if (!::SetFilePointerEx(fileHandle, offset, ¤tFilePos, FILE_CURRENT)) { thatQ->setError(QFile::UnspecifiedError, qt_error_string()); return 0; } return qint64(currentFilePos.QuadPart); +#else + LARGE_INTEGER filepos; + filepos.HighPart = 0; + DWORD newFilePointer = SetFilePointer(fileHandle, 0, &filepos.HighPart, FILE_CURRENT); + if (newFilePointer == 0xFFFFFFFF && GetLastError() != NO_ERROR) { + thatQ->setError(QFile::UnspecifiedError, qt_error_string()); + return 0; + } + + filepos.LowPart = newFilePointer; + return filepos.QuadPart; #endif } @@ -632,39 +586,32 @@ qint64 QFSFileEnginePrivate::nativePos() const */ bool QFSFileEnginePrivate::nativeSeek(qint64 pos) { - Q_Q(const QFSFileEngine); - QFSFileEngine *thatQ = const_cast<QFSFileEngine *>(q); + Q_Q(QFSFileEngine); if (fh || fd != -1) { // stdlib / stdio mode. return seekFdFh(pos); } -#if !defined(QT_NO_LIBRARY) && !defined(Q_OS_WINCE) - QFSFileEnginePrivate::resolveLibs(); - if (!ptrSetFilePointerEx) { -#endif - DWORD newFilePointer; - LARGE_INTEGER *li = reinterpret_cast<LARGE_INTEGER*>(&pos); - newFilePointer = SetFilePointer(fileHandle, li->LowPart, &li->HighPart, FILE_BEGIN); - if (newFilePointer == 0xFFFFFFFF && GetLastError() != NO_ERROR) { - thatQ->setError(QFile::PositionError, qt_error_string()); - return false; - } - - // Note: This is the case for MOC, UIC, qmake and other - // bootstrapped tools, and for Windows CE. - return true; -#if !defined(QT_NO_LIBRARY) && !defined(Q_OS_WINCE) - } - +#if !defined(Q_OS_WINCE) LARGE_INTEGER currentFilePos; LARGE_INTEGER offset; offset.QuadPart = pos; - if (ptrSetFilePointerEx(fileHandle, offset, ¤tFilePos, FILE_BEGIN) == 0) { - thatQ->setError(QFile::UnspecifiedError, qt_error_string()); + if (!::SetFilePointerEx(fileHandle, offset, ¤tFilePos, FILE_BEGIN)) { + q->setError(QFile::UnspecifiedError, qt_error_string()); return false; } + + return true; +#else + DWORD newFilePointer; + LARGE_INTEGER *li = reinterpret_cast<LARGE_INTEGER*>(&pos); + newFilePointer = SetFilePointer(fileHandle, li->LowPart, &li->HighPart, FILE_BEGIN); + if (newFilePointer == 0xFFFFFFFF && GetLastError() != NO_ERROR) { + q->setError(QFile::PositionError, qt_error_string()); + return false; + } + return true; #endif } @@ -1044,10 +991,10 @@ QString QFSFileEngine::homePath() QString ret; #if !defined(QT_NO_LIBRARY) QFSFileEnginePrivate::resolveLibs(); - if (ptrOpenProcessToken && ptrGetUserProfileDirectoryW) { + if (ptrGetUserProfileDirectoryW) { HANDLE hnd = ::GetCurrentProcess(); HANDLE token = 0; - BOOL ok = ::ptrOpenProcessToken(hnd, TOKEN_QUERY, &token); + BOOL ok = ::OpenProcessToken(hnd, TOKEN_QUERY, &token); if (ok) { DWORD dwBufferSize = 0; // First call, to determine size of the strings (with '\0'). @@ -1393,7 +1340,7 @@ QAbstractFileEngine::FileFlags QFSFileEnginePrivate::getPermissions() const enum { ReadMask = 0x00000001, WriteMask = 0x00000002, ExecMask = 0x00000020 }; resolveLibs(); - if(ptrGetNamedSecurityInfoW && ptrAllocateAndInitializeSid && ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW && ptrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW && ptrFreeSid) { + if(ptrGetNamedSecurityInfoW && ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW && ptrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW) { QString fname = filePath.endsWith(QLatin1String(".lnk")) ? readLink(filePath) : filePath; DWORD res = ptrGetNamedSecurityInfoW((wchar_t*)fname.utf16(), SE_FILE_OBJECT, @@ -1435,21 +1382,14 @@ QAbstractFileEngine::FileFlags QFSFileEnginePrivate::getPermissions() const ret |= QAbstractFileEngine::ExeGroupPerm; } { //other (world) - // Create SID for Everyone (World) - SID_IDENTIFIER_AUTHORITY worldAuth = { SECURITY_WORLD_SID_AUTHORITY }; - PSID pWorld = 0; - if(ptrAllocateAndInitializeSid(&worldAuth, 1, SECURITY_WORLD_RID, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0, &pWorld)) { - ptrBuildTrusteeWithSidW(&trustee, pWorld); - if(ptrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW(pDacl, &trustee, &access_mask) != ERROR_SUCCESS) - access_mask = (ACCESS_MASK)-1; // ### - if(access_mask & ReadMask) - ret |= QAbstractFileEngine::ReadOtherPerm; - if(access_mask & WriteMask) - ret |= QAbstractFileEngine::WriteOtherPerm; - if(access_mask & ExecMask) - ret |= QAbstractFileEngine::ExeOtherPerm; - } - ptrFreeSid(pWorld); + if(ptrGetEffectiveRightsFromAclW(pDacl, &worldTrusteeW, &access_mask) != ERROR_SUCCESS) + access_mask = (ACCESS_MASK)-1; // ### + if(access_mask & ReadMask) + ret |= QAbstractFileEngine::ReadOtherPerm; + if(access_mask & WriteMask) + ret |= QAbstractFileEngine::WriteOtherPerm; + if(access_mask & ExecMask) + ret |= QAbstractFileEngine::ExeOtherPerm; } LocalFree(pSD); } @@ -1703,12 +1643,8 @@ bool QFSFileEngine::setPermissions(uint perms) if (mode == 0) // not supported return false; -#if !defined(Q_OS_WINCE) - ret = ::_wchmod((wchar_t*)d->filePath.utf16(), mode) == 0; -#else - ret = ::_wchmod((wchar_t*)d->longFileName(d->filePath).utf16(), mode); -#endif - return ret; + ret = ::_wchmod((wchar_t*)d->longFileName(d->filePath).utf16(), mode) == 0; + return ret; } bool QFSFileEngine::setSize(qint64 size) diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qiodevice.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qiodevice.cpp index 2df7a27..4f66edd 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qiodevice.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qiodevice.cpp @@ -811,7 +811,7 @@ qint64 QIODevice::read(char *data, qint64 maxSize) #endif if (readFromDevice < bytesToBuffer) - d->buffer.truncate(readFromDevice < 0 ? 0 : int(readFromDevice)); + d->buffer.truncate(int(readFromDevice)); if (!d->buffer.isEmpty()) { lastReadChunkSize = d->buffer.read(data + readSoFar, maxSize - readSoFar); readSoFar += lastReadChunkSize; diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice.cpp index 89ed041..185d961 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice.cpp @@ -40,10 +40,9 @@ ****************************************************************************/ #include "qnoncontiguousbytedevice_p.h" -#include <QObject> -#include <QBuffer> -#include <QDebug> -#include <QFile> +#include <qbuffer.h> +#include <qdebug.h> +#include <qfile.h> QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice_p.h b/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice_p.h index dd34c67..ecf9b9c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/io/qnoncontiguousbytedevice_p.h @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ // We mean it. // -#include <QObject> +#include <QtCore/qobject.h> #include <QtCore/qbytearray.h> #include <QtCore/qbuffer.h> #include <QtCore/qiodevice.h> diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp index 6fc6710..18ed676 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qprocess.cpp @@ -151,12 +151,19 @@ void QProcessPrivate::Channel::clear() to communicate with them. \ingroup io - \ingroup misc - \mainclass + \reentrant + \section1 Running a Process + To start a process, pass the name and command line arguments of - the program you want to run as arguments to start(). For example: + the program you want to run as arguments to start(). Arguments + are supplied as individual strings in a QStringList. + + For example, the following code snippet runs the analog clock + example in the Motif style on X11 platforms by passing strings + containing "-style" and "motif" as two items in the list of + arguments: \snippet doc/src/snippets/qprocess/qprocess-simpleexecution.cpp 0 \dots @@ -1585,16 +1592,16 @@ QByteArray QProcess::readAllStandardError() process, a warning may be printed at the console, and the existing process will continue running. - Note that arguments that contain spaces are not passed to the + \note Arguments that contain spaces are not passed to the process as separate arguments. - \bold{Windows:} Arguments that contain spaces are wrapped in quotes. - \note Processes are started asynchronously, which means the started() and error() signals may be delayed. Call waitForStarted() to make sure the process has started (or has failed to start) and those signals have been emitted. + \bold{Windows:} Arguments that contain spaces are wrapped in quotes. + \sa pid(), started(), waitForStarted() */ void QProcess::start(const QString &program, const QStringList &arguments, OpenMode mode) @@ -1860,7 +1867,7 @@ bool QProcess::startDetached(const QString &program, otherwise returns false. If the calling process exits, the detached process will continue to live. - Note that arguments that contain spaces are not passed to the + \note Arguments that contain spaces are not passed to the process as separate arguments. \bold{Unix:} The started process will run in its own session and act diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp index 34c21d7..ab4a7b7 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qresource.cpp @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Q_GLOBAL_STATIC(QStringList, resourceSearchPaths) \brief The QResource class provides an interface for reading directly from resources. \ingroup io - \mainclass + \reentrant \since 4.2 diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp index d7cf561..4c19cbf 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qsettings.cpp @@ -2011,8 +2011,7 @@ void QConfFileSettingsPrivate::ensureSectionParsed(QConfFile *confFile, \brief The QSettings class provides persistent platform-independent application settings. \ingroup io - \ingroup misc - \mainclass + \reentrant Users normally expect an application to remember its settings diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp index 13a0e4c..d76e99b 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qtemporaryfile.cpp @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ QTemporaryFilePrivate::~QTemporaryFilePrivate() \brief The QTemporaryFile class is an I/O device that operates on temporary files. \ingroup io - \mainclass + QTemporaryFile is used to create unique temporary files safely. The file itself is created by calling open(). The name of the diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp index 3b94c03..ad0a67d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qtextstream.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ static const int QTEXTSTREAM_BUFFERSIZE = 16384; reading and writing text. \ingroup io - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant QTextStream can operate on a QIODevice, a QByteArray or a @@ -3085,8 +3085,6 @@ QLocale QTextStream::locale() const \compat \reentrant - \ingroup io - \ingroup text Use QTextStream instead. */ @@ -3113,8 +3111,6 @@ QLocale QTextStream::locale() const \compat \reentrant - \ingroup io - \ingroup text Use QTextStream instead. */ diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp b/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp index 77df601..acbac36 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/io/qurl.cpp @@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ \reentrant \ingroup io - \ingroup misc + \ingroup network \ingroup shared - \mainclass + It can parse and construct URLs in both encoded and unencoded form. QUrl also has support for internationalized domain names @@ -4024,6 +4024,29 @@ QString QUrlPrivate::createErrorString() } /*! + \macro QT_NO_URL_CAST_FROM_STRING + \relates QUrl + + Disables automatic conversions from QString (or char *) to QUrl. + + Compiling your code with this define is useful when you have a lot of + code that uses QString for file names and you wish to convert it to + use QUrl for network transparency. In any code that uses QUrl, it can + help avoid missing QUrl::resolved() calls, and other misuses of + QString to QUrl conversions. + + \oldcode + url = filename; // probably not what you want + \newcode + url = QUrl::fromLocalFile(filename); + url = baseurl.resolved(QUrl(filename)); + \endcode + + \sa QT_NO_CAST_FROM_ASCII +*/ + + +/*! Constructs a URL by parsing \a url. \a url is assumed to be in human readable representation, with no percent encoding. QUrl will automatically percent encode all characters that are not allowed in a URL. diff --git a/src/corelib/io/qurl.h b/src/corelib/io/qurl.h index febaf4a..65da5bf 100644 --- a/src/corelib/io/qurl.h +++ b/src/corelib/io/qurl.h @@ -81,12 +81,17 @@ public: Q_DECLARE_FLAGS(FormattingOptions, FormattingOption) QUrl(); +#ifdef QT_NO_URL_CAST_FROM_STRING + explicit +#endif QUrl(const QString &url); QUrl(const QString &url, ParsingMode mode); // ### Qt 5: merge the two constructors, with mode = TolerantMode QUrl(const QUrl ©); QUrl &operator =(const QUrl ©); +#ifndef QT_NO_URL_CAST_FROM_STRING QUrl &operator =(const QString &url); +#endif ~QUrl(); void setUrl(const QString &url); diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/kernel.pri b/src/corelib/kernel/kernel.pri index 124b2b3..003693b 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/kernel.pri +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/kernel.pri @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ unix:!symbian { HEADERS += \ kernel/qeventdispatcher_glib_p.h QMAKE_CXXFLAGS += $$QT_CFLAGS_GLIB - LIBS +=$$QT_LIBS_GLIB + LIBS_PRIVATE +=$$QT_LIBS_GLIB } SOURCES += \ kernel/qeventdispatcher_unix.cpp diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp index a414862..4fa0cd2 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstracteventdispatcher.cpp @@ -168,7 +168,6 @@ void QAbstractEventDispatcherPrivate::releaseTimerId(int timerId) \class QAbstractEventDispatcher \brief The QAbstractEventDispatcher class provides an interface to manage Qt's event queue. - \ingroup application \ingroup events An event dispatcher receives events from the window system and other diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp index cfc961c..d6d1bcf 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel.cpp @@ -488,35 +488,48 @@ const QHash<int,QByteArray> &QAbstractItemModelPrivate::defaultRoleNames() return *qDefaultRoleNames(); } -/*! - \internal - return true if \a value contains a numerical type - This function is used by our Q{Tree,Widget,Table}WidgetModel classes to sort. - We cannot rely on QVariant::canConvert because this would take strings as double - and then not sort strings correctly -*/ -bool QAbstractItemModelPrivate::canConvertToDouble(const QVariant &value) +static uint typeOfVariant(const QVariant &value) { + //return 0 for integer, 1 for floating point and 2 for other switch (value.userType()) { case QVariant::Bool: case QVariant::Int: case QVariant::UInt: case QVariant::LongLong: case QVariant::ULongLong: - case QVariant::Double: case QVariant::Char: - case QMetaType::Float: case QMetaType::Short: case QMetaType::UShort: case QMetaType::UChar: case QMetaType::ULong: case QMetaType::Long: - return true; + return 0; + case QVariant::Double: + case QMetaType::Float: + return 1; default: - return false; + return 2; + } +} + +/*! + \internal + return true if \a value contains a numerical type + + This function is used by our Q{Tree,Widget,Table}WidgetModel classes to sort. +*/ +bool QAbstractItemModelPrivate::variantLessThan(const QVariant &v1, const QVariant &v2) +{ + switch(qMax(typeOfVariant(v1), typeOfVariant(v2))) + { + case 0: //integer type + return v1.toLongLong() < v2.toLongLong(); + case 1: //floating point + return v1.toReal() < v2.toReal(); + default: + return v1.toString() < v2.toString(); } - return false; } void QAbstractItemModelPrivate::removePersistentIndexData(QPersistentModelIndexData *data) @@ -740,7 +753,7 @@ void QAbstractItemModelPrivate::columnsRemoved(const QModelIndex &parent, \brief The QModelIndex class is used to locate data in a data model. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + This class is used as an index into item models derived from QAbstractItemModel. The index is used by item views, delegates, and @@ -928,7 +941,7 @@ void QAbstractItemModelPrivate::columnsRemoved(const QModelIndex &parent, item model classes. \ingroup model-view - \mainclass + The QAbstractItemModel class defines the standard interface that item models must use to be able to interoperate with other components in the diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel_p.h b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel_p.h index 76c2d70..e81e627 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qabstractitemmodel_p.h @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ public: void columnsAboutToBeRemoved(const QModelIndex &parent, int first, int last); void columnsRemoved(const QModelIndex &parent, int first, int last); static QAbstractItemModel *staticEmptyModel(); - static bool canConvertToDouble(const QVariant &value); + static bool variantLessThan(const QVariant &v1, const QVariant &v2); inline QModelIndex createIndex(int row, int column, void *data = 0) const { return q_func()->createIndex(row, column, data); diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp index df5941f..7fd975d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qbasictimer.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QBasicTimer \brief The QBasicTimer class provides timer events for objects. - \ingroup time \ingroup events This is a fast, lightweight, and low-level class used by Qt diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp index 4e9096a..875c3cc 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreapplication.cpp @@ -382,9 +382,6 @@ QString qAppName() \brief The QCoreApplication class provides an event loop for console Qt applications. - \ingroup application - \mainclass - This class is used by non-GUI applications to provide their event loop. For non-GUI application that uses Qt, there should be exactly one QCoreApplication object. For GUI applications, see diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp index ed896a6..04301f6 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreevent.cpp @@ -54,7 +54,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE event classes. Event objects contain event parameters. \ingroup events - \ingroup environment Qt's main event loop (QCoreApplication::exec()) fetches native window system events from the event queue, translates them into diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreglobaldata.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreglobaldata.cpp index c2a226d..6b90ed7 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreglobaldata.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qcoreglobaldata.cpp @@ -41,8 +41,6 @@ #include "qcoreglobaldata_p.h" -#include <QtDebug> - QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE Q_GLOBAL_STATIC(QCoreGlobalData, globalInstance) diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qfunctions_wince.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qfunctions_wince.cpp index 2b5d4fe..77f680a 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qfunctions_wince.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qfunctions_wince.cpp @@ -292,13 +292,14 @@ bool qt_wince__chmod(const char *file, int mode) bool qt_wince__wchmod(const wchar_t *file, int mode) { + BOOL success = FALSE; // ### Does not work properly, what about just adding one property? if(mode&_S_IWRITE) { - return SetFileAttributes(file, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL); + success = SetFileAttributes(file, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL); } else if((mode&_S_IREAD) && !(mode&_S_IWRITE)) { - return SetFileAttributes(file, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_READONLY); + success = SetFileAttributes(file, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_READONLY); } - return false; + return success ? 0 : -1; } HANDLE qt_wince_CreateFileA(LPCSTR filename, DWORD access, DWORD share, LPSECURITY_ATTRIBUTES attr, DWORD dispo, DWORD flags, HANDLE tempFile) diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp index 6384d17..55c8e12 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qobject.cpp @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ int QMetaCallEvent::placeMetaCall(QObject *object) \brief The QObject class is the base class of all Qt objects. \ingroup objectmodel - \mainclass + \reentrant QObject is the heart of the \l{Qt object model}. The central diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp index fb7a81e..624336f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qpointer.cpp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ \brief The QPointer class is a template class that provides guarded pointers to QObjects. \ingroup objectmodel - \mainclass + A guarded pointer, QPointer<T>, behaves like a normal C++ pointer \c{T *}, except that it is automatically set to 0 when the diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp index cd69b59..593912c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsharedmemory.cpp @@ -91,7 +91,6 @@ QSharedMemoryPrivate::makePlatformSafeKey(const QString &key, /*! \class QSharedMemory - \ingroup ipc \since 4.4 \brief The QSharedMemory class provides access to a shared memory segment. diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp index 5e89da2..7b2097d 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsignalmapper.cpp @@ -66,8 +66,8 @@ public: \class QSignalMapper \brief The QSignalMapper class bundles signals from identifiable senders. - \ingroup io - \mainclass + \ingroup objectmodel + This class collects a set of parameterless signals, and re-emits them with integer, string or widget parameters corresponding to diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp index 4ac1cbb..85a3ea3 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsocketnotifier.cpp @@ -56,6 +56,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QSocketNotifier class provides support for monitoring activity on a file descriptor. + \ingroup network \ingroup io The QSocketNotifier makes it possible to integrate Qt's event diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp index f885662..07647d0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qsystemsemaphore.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QSystemSemaphore - \ingroup ipc \since 4.4 \brief The QSystemSemaphore class provides a general counting system semaphore. diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp index f40f491..6c4eb1b 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qtimer.cpp @@ -50,9 +50,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QTimer \brief The QTimer class provides repetitive and single-shot timers. - \ingroup time \ingroup events - \mainclass + The QTimer class provides a high-level programming interface for timers. To use it, create a QTimer, connect its timeout() signal @@ -101,10 +100,22 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE more and more platforms, and we expect that zero-millisecond QTimers will gradually be replaced by \l{QThread}s. - Note that QTimer's accuracy depends on the underlying operating - system and hardware. Most platforms support an accuracy of - 1 millisecond. If Qt is unable to deliver the requested number of - timer clicks, it will silently discard some. + \section1 Accuracy and Timer Resolution + + Timers will never time out earlier than the specified timeout value + and they are not guaranteed to time out at the exact value specified. + In many situations, they may time out late by a period of time that + depends on the accuracy of the system timers. + + The accuracy of timers depends on the underlying operating system + and hardware. Most platforms support a resolution of 1 millisecond, + though the accuracy of the timer will not equal this resolution + in many real-world situations. + + If Qt is unable to deliver the requested number of timer clicks, + it will silently discard some. + + \section1 Alternatives to QTimer An alternative to using QTimer is to call QObject::startTimer() for your object and reimplement the QObject::timerEvent() event diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp index de1157c..b9e6e14 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qtranslator.cpp @@ -249,8 +249,6 @@ public: output. \ingroup i18n - \ingroup environment - \mainclass An object of this class contains a set of translations from a source language to a target language. QTranslator provides diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp index 54b4f67..d5b2d16 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.cpp @@ -685,6 +685,7 @@ static bool convert(const QVariant::Private *d, QVariant::Type t, void *result, break; case QVariant::Url: *str = v_cast<QUrl>(d)->toString(); + break; default: return false; } @@ -962,10 +963,10 @@ static bool convert(const QVariant::Private *d, QVariant::Type t, void *result, float *f = static_cast<float *>(result); switch (d->type) { case QVariant::String: - *f = float(v_cast<QString>(d)->toDouble(ok)); + *f = v_cast<QString>(d)->toFloat(ok); break; case QVariant::ByteArray: - *f = float(v_cast<QByteArray>(d)->toDouble(ok)); + *f = v_cast<QByteArray>(d)->toFloat(ok); break; case QVariant::Bool: *f = float(d->data.b); @@ -1080,7 +1081,7 @@ static void streamDebug(QDebug dbg, const QVariant &v) dbg.nospace() << v.toULongLong(); break; case QMetaType::Float: - dbg.nospace() << qVariantValue<float>(v); + dbg.nospace() << v.toFloat(); break; case QMetaType::QObjectStar: dbg.nospace() << qVariantValue<QObject *>(v); @@ -1190,9 +1191,8 @@ const QVariant::Handler *QVariant::handler = &qt_kernel_variant_handler; \brief The QVariant class acts like a union for the most common Qt data types. \ingroup objectmodel - \ingroup misc \ingroup shared - \mainclass + Because C++ forbids unions from including types that have non-default constructors or destructors, most interesting Qt @@ -2357,16 +2357,17 @@ QBitArray QVariant::toBitArray() const } template <typename T> -inline T qNumVariantToHelper(const QVariant::Private &d, QVariant::Type t, +inline T qNumVariantToHelper(const QVariant::Private &d, const QVariant::Handler *handler, bool *ok, const T& val) { + uint t = qMetaTypeId<T>(); if (ok) *ok = true; if (d.type == t) return val; T ret; - if (!handler->convert(&d, t, &ret, ok) && ok) + if (!handler->convert(&d, QVariant::Type(t), &ret, ok) && ok) *ok = false; return ret; } @@ -2388,7 +2389,7 @@ inline T qNumVariantToHelper(const QVariant::Private &d, QVariant::Type t, */ int QVariant::toInt(bool *ok) const { - return qNumVariantToHelper<int>(d, Int, handler, ok, d.data.i); + return qNumVariantToHelper<int>(d, handler, ok, d.data.i); } /*! @@ -2408,7 +2409,7 @@ int QVariant::toInt(bool *ok) const */ uint QVariant::toUInt(bool *ok) const { - return qNumVariantToHelper<uint>(d, UInt, handler, ok, d.data.u); + return qNumVariantToHelper<uint>(d, handler, ok, d.data.u); } /*! @@ -2423,7 +2424,7 @@ uint QVariant::toUInt(bool *ok) const */ qlonglong QVariant::toLongLong(bool *ok) const { - return qNumVariantToHelper<qlonglong>(d, LongLong, handler, ok, d.data.ll); + return qNumVariantToHelper<qlonglong>(d, handler, ok, d.data.ll); } /*! @@ -2439,7 +2440,7 @@ qlonglong QVariant::toLongLong(bool *ok) const */ qulonglong QVariant::toULongLong(bool *ok) const { - return qNumVariantToHelper<qulonglong>(d, ULongLong, handler, ok, d.data.ull); + return qNumVariantToHelper<qulonglong>(d, handler, ok, d.data.ull); } /*! @@ -2466,7 +2467,7 @@ bool QVariant::toBool() const /*! Returns the variant as a double if the variant has type() \l - Double, \l Bool, \l ByteArray, \l Int, \l LongLong, \l String, \l + Double, \l QMetaType::Float, \l Bool, \l ByteArray, \l Int, \l LongLong, \l String, \l UInt, or \l ULongLong; otherwise returns 0.0. If \a ok is non-null: \c{*}\a{ok} is set to true if the value could be @@ -2476,7 +2477,41 @@ bool QVariant::toBool() const */ double QVariant::toDouble(bool *ok) const { - return qNumVariantToHelper<double>(d, Double, handler, ok, d.data.d); + return qNumVariantToHelper<double>(d, handler, ok, d.data.d); +} + +/*! + Returns the variant as a float if the variant has type() \l + Double, \l QMetaType::Float, \l Bool, \l ByteArray, \l Int, \l LongLong, \l String, \l + UInt, or \l ULongLong; otherwise returns 0.0. + + \since 4.6 + + If \a ok is non-null: \c{*}\a{ok} is set to true if the value could be + converted to a double; otherwise \c{*}\a{ok} is set to false. + + \sa canConvert(), convert() +*/ +float QVariant::toFloat(bool *ok) const +{ + return qNumVariantToHelper<float>(d, handler, ok, d.data.d); +} + +/*! + Returns the variant as a qreal if the variant has type() \l + Double, \l QMetaType::Float, \l Bool, \l ByteArray, \l Int, \l LongLong, \l String, \l + UInt, or \l ULongLong; otherwise returns 0.0. + + \since 4.6 + + If \a ok is non-null: \c{*}\a{ok} is set to true if the value could be + converted to a double; otherwise \c{*}\a{ok} is set to false. + + \sa canConvert(), convert() +*/ +qreal QVariant::toReal(bool *ok) const +{ + return qNumVariantToHelper<qreal>(d, handler, ok, d.data.d); } /*! @@ -2767,7 +2802,7 @@ bool QVariant::cmp(const QVariant &v) const if (d.type != v2.d.type) { if (qIsNumericType(d.type) && qIsNumericType(v.d.type)) { if (qIsFloatingPoint(d.type) || qIsFloatingPoint(v.d.type)) - return qFuzzyCompare(toDouble(), v.toDouble()); + return qFuzzyCompare(toReal(), v.toReal()); else return toLongLong() == v.toLongLong(); } diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.h b/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.h index 569355a..79bd5b8 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.h +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qvariant.h @@ -250,6 +250,8 @@ class Q_CORE_EXPORT QVariant qulonglong toULongLong(bool *ok = 0) const; bool toBool() const; double toDouble(bool *ok = 0) const; + float toFloat(bool *ok = 0) const; + qreal toReal(bool *ok = 0) const; QByteArray toByteArray() const; QBitArray toBitArray() const; QString toString() const; diff --git a/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp b/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp index f54d564..e5ce02c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/kernel/qwineventnotifier_p.cpp @@ -52,8 +52,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QWinEventNotifier \brief The QWinEventNotifier class provides support for the Windows Wait functions. - \ingroup io - The QWinEventNotifier class makes it possible to use the wait functions on windows in a asynchronous manner. With this class you can register a HANDLE to an event and get notification when diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/plugin.pri b/src/corelib/plugin/plugin.pri index aaecec9..c05ff48 100644 --- a/src/corelib/plugin/plugin.pri +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/plugin.pri @@ -22,3 +22,5 @@ win32 { unix { SOURCES += plugin/qlibrary_unix.cpp } + +LIBS_PRIVATE += $$QMAKE_LIBS_DYNLOAD diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp b/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp index 5d2ed13..4cd3386 100644 --- a/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/qlibrary.cpp @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ Q_GLOBAL_STATIC(QMutex, qt_library_mutex) \reentrant \brief The QLibrary class loads shared libraries at runtime. - \mainclass + \ingroup plugins An instance of a QLibrary object operates on a single shared diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/qplugin.qdoc b/src/corelib/plugin/qplugin.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3b8f1b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/qplugin.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \headerfile <QtPlugin> + \title Macros for Defining Plugins + + \brief The <QtPlugin> header files defines macros for defining plugins. + + \sa {How to Create Qt Plugins} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE(ClassName, Identifier) + \relates <QtPlugin> + + This macro associates the given \a Identifier (a string literal) + to the interface class called \a ClassName. The \a Identifier must + be unique. For example: + + \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/interfaces.h 3 + + This macro is normally used right after the class definition for + \a ClassName, in a header file. See the + \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint} example for details. + + If you want to use Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE with interface classes + declared in a namespace then you have to make sure the Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE + is not inside a namespace though. For example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 0 + + \sa Q_INTERFACES(), Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2(), {How to Create Qt Plugins} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN(ClassName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + \obsolete + + Use Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() instead. This macro is equivalent to + Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2(\a ClassName, \a ClassName). +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2(PluginName, ClassName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + \since 4.1 + \keyword Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2 + + This macro exports the plugin class \a ClassName for the plugin specified + by \a PluginName. The value of \a PluginName should correspond to the + \l{qmake Variable Reference#TARGET}{TARGET} specified in the plugin's + project file. + + There should be exactly one occurrence of this macro in the source code + for a Qt plugin, and it should be used where the implementation is written + rather than in a header file. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 1 + + See the \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint} example for details. + + \sa Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE(), {How to Create Qt Plugins} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_IMPORT_PLUGIN(PluginName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + + This macro imports the plugin named \a PluginName, corresponding + to the \l{qmake Variable Reference#TARGET}{TARGET} specified in the + plugin's project file. + + Inserting this macro into your application's source code will allow + you to make use of a static plugin. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 2 + + Static plugins must also be included by the linker when your + application is built. For Qt's predefined plugins, + you can use the \c QTPLUGIN to add + the required plugins to your build. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qplugin.qdoc 3 + + \sa {Static Plugins}, {How to Create Qt Plugins}, {Using qmake} +*/ + +/*! + \macro Q_EXPORT_STATIC_PLUGIN(ClassName) + \relates <QtPlugin> + \internal +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp b/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp index 33972f2..971cc2b 100644 --- a/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/qpluginloader.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \reentrant \brief The QPluginLoader class loads a plugin at run-time. - \mainclass + \ingroup plugins QPluginLoader provides access to a \l{How to Create Qt diff --git a/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp b/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp index 3d11f53..7e0e242 100644 --- a/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/plugin/quuid.cpp @@ -50,7 +50,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \brief The QUuid class stores a Universally Unique Identifier (UUID). \reentrant - \ingroup misc Using \e{U}niversally \e{U}nique \e{ID}entifiers (UUID) is a standard way to uniquely identify entities in a distributed diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp index eaa7308..db9a415 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qmutex.cpp @@ -56,8 +56,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment - \mainclass The purpose of a QMutex is to protect an object, data structure or section of code so that only one thread can access it at a time @@ -416,7 +414,6 @@ void QMutex::unlock() \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment Locking and unlocking a QMutex in complex functions and statements or in exception handling code is error-prone and diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp index 6db10a0..8ce58e9 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qreadwritelock.cpp @@ -57,7 +57,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment A read-write lock is a synchronization tool for protecting resources that can be accessed for reading and writing. This type @@ -441,7 +440,6 @@ void QReadWriteLock::unlock() \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment The purpose of QReadLocker (and QWriteLocker) is to simplify QReadWriteLock locking and unlocking. Locking and unlocking @@ -514,7 +512,6 @@ void QReadWriteLock::unlock() \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment The purpose of QWriteLocker (and QReadLocker is to simplify QReadWriteLock locking and unlocking. Locking and unlocking diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp index 38e800d..df8036f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qsemaphore.cpp @@ -54,7 +54,6 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment A semaphore is a generalization of a mutex. While a mutex can only be locked once, it's possible to acquire a semaphore diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp index 80954c7..929b45c 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qthread.cpp @@ -202,8 +202,6 @@ QThreadPrivate::~QThreadPrivate() \brief The QThread class provides platform-independent threads. \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment - \mainclass A QThread represents a separate thread of control within the program; it shares data with all the other threads within the diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp b/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp index fa77fe8..7a5f76f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qthreadstorage.cpp @@ -191,8 +191,6 @@ void QThreadStorageData::finish(void **p) \threadsafe \ingroup thread - \ingroup environment - \mainclass QThreadStorage is a template class that provides per-thread data storage. diff --git a/src/corelib/thread/qwaitcondition.qdoc b/src/corelib/thread/qwaitcondition.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae2de6c --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/thread/qwaitcondition.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QWaitCondition + \brief The QWaitCondition class provides a condition variable for + synchronizing threads. + + \threadsafe + + \ingroup thread + + QWaitCondition allows a thread to tell other threads that some + sort of condition has been met. One or many threads can block + waiting for a QWaitCondition to set a condition with wakeOne() or + wakeAll(). Use wakeOne() to wake one randomly selected condition or + wakeAll() to wake them all. + + For example, let's suppose that we have three tasks that should + be performed whenever the user presses a key. Each task could be + split into a thread, each of which would have a + \l{QThread::run()}{run()} body like this: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 0 + + Here, the \c keyPressed variable is a global variable of type + QWaitCondition. + + A fourth thread would read key presses and wake the other three + threads up every time it receives one, like this: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 1 + + The order in which the three threads are woken up is undefined. + Also, if some of the threads are still in \c do_something() when + the key is pressed, they won't be woken up (since they're not + waiting on the condition variable) and so the task will not be + performed for that key press. This issue can be solved using a + counter and a QMutex to guard it. For example, here's the new + code for the worker threads: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 2 + + Here's the code for the fourth thread: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_corelib_thread_qwaitcondition_unix.cpp 3 + + The mutex is necessary because the results of two threads + attempting to change the value of the same variable + simultaneously are unpredictable. + + Wait conditions are a powerful thread synchronization primitive. + The \l{threads/waitconditions}{Wait Conditions} example shows how + to use QWaitCondition as an alternative to QSemaphore for + controlling access to a circular buffer shared by a producer + thread and a consumer thread. + + \sa QMutex, QSemaphore, QThread, {Wait Conditions Example} +*/ + +/*! + \fn QWaitCondition::QWaitCondition() + + Constructs a new wait condition object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QWaitCondition::~QWaitCondition() + + Destroys the wait condition object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QWaitCondition::wakeOne() + + Wakes one thread waiting on the wait condition. The thread that + is woken up depends on the operating system's scheduling + policies, and cannot be controlled or predicted. + + If you want to wake up a specific thread, the solution is + typically to use different wait conditions and have different + threads wait on different conditions. + + \sa wakeAll() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QWaitCondition::wakeAll() + + Wakes all threads waiting on the wait condition. The order in + which the threads are woken up depends on the operating system's + scheduling policies and cannot be controlled or predicted. + + \sa wakeOne() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QWaitCondition::wait(QMutex *mutex, unsigned long time) + + Releases the locked \a mutex and waits on the wait condition. The + \a mutex must be initially locked by the calling thread. If \a + mutex is not in a locked state, this function returns + immediately. If \a mutex is a recursive mutex, this function + returns immediately. The \a mutex will be unlocked, and the + calling thread will block until either of these conditions is met: + + \list + \o Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This + function will return true in this case. + \o \a time milliseconds has elapsed. If \a time is \c ULONG_MAX + (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event + must be signalled). This function will return false if the + wait timed out. + \endlist + + The mutex will be returned to the same locked state. This + function is provided to allow the atomic transition from the + locked state to the wait state. + + \sa wakeOne(), wakeAll() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QWaitCondition::wait(QReadWriteLock *readWriteLock, unsigned long time) + \since 4.4 + + Releases the locked \a readWriteLock and waits on the wait + condition. The \a readWriteLock must be initially locked by the + calling thread. If \a readWriteLock is not in a locked state, this + function returns immediately. The \a readWriteLock must not be + locked recursively, otherwise this function will not release the + lock properly. The \a readWriteLock will be unlocked, and the + calling thread will block until either of these conditions is met: + + \list + \o Another thread signals it using wakeOne() or wakeAll(). This + function will return true in this case. + \o \a time milliseconds has elapsed. If \a time is \c ULONG_MAX + (the default), then the wait will never timeout (the event + must be signalled). This function will return false if the + wait timed out. + \endlist + + The \a readWriteLock will be returned to the same locked + state. This function is provided to allow the atomic transition + from the locked state to the wait state. + + \sa wakeOne(), wakeAll() +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.h b/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.h index d334a03..3e5c3cc 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.h +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.h @@ -141,23 +141,6 @@ inline void qCount(const Container &container, const T &value, Size &n) qCount(container.constBegin(), container.constEnd(), value, n); } - -#if (defined Q_CC_MSVC && _MSC_VER < 1300) || defined(Q_CC_MWERKS) -template <typename T> -inline void qSwap(T &value1, T &value2) -{ - qSwap_helper<T>(value1, value2, (T *)0); -} -#else -template <typename T> -inline void qSwap(T &value1, T &value2) -{ - T t = value1; - value1 = value2; - value2 = t; -} -#endif - #ifdef qdoc template <typename T> LessThan qLess() diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7b7798 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qalgorithms.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,651 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \headerfile <QtAlgorithms> + \title Generic Algorithms + \ingroup classlists + + \brief The <QtAlgorithms> header provides generic template-based algorithms. + + Qt provides a number of global template functions in \c + <QtAlgorithms> that work on containers and perform well-know + algorithms. You can use these algorithms with any \l {container + class} that provides STL-style iterators, including Qt's QList, + QLinkedList, QVector, QMap, and QHash classes. + + These functions have taken their inspiration from similar + functions available in the STL \c <algorithm> header. Most of them + have a direct STL equivalent; for example, qCopyBackward() is the + same as STL's copy_backward() algorithm. + + If STL is available on all your target platforms, you can use the + STL algorithms instead of their Qt counterparts. One reason why + you might want to use the STL algorithms is that STL provides + dozens and dozens of algorithms, whereas Qt only provides the most + important ones, making no attempt to duplicate functionality that + is already provided by the C++ standard. + + Most algorithms take \l {STL-style iterators} as parameters. The + algorithms are generic in the sense that they aren't bound to a + specific iterator class; you can use them with any iterators that + meet a certain set of requirements. + + Let's take the qFill() algorithm as an example. Unlike QVector, + QList has no fill() function that can be used to fill a list with + a particular value. If you need that functionality, you can use + qFill(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 0 + + qFill() takes a begin iterator, an end iterator, and a value. + In the example above, we pass \c list.begin() and \c list.end() + as the begin and end iterators, but this doesn't have to be + the case: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 1 + + Different algorithms can have different requirements for the + iterators they accept. For example, qFill() accepts two + \l {forward iterators}. The iterator types required are specified + for each algorithm. If an iterator of the wrong type is passed (for + example, if QList::ConstIterator is passed as an \l {output + iterator}), you will always get a compiler error, although not + necessarily a very informative one. + + Some algorithms have special requirements on the value type + stored in the containers. For example, qEqual() requires that the + value type supports operator==(), which it uses to compare items. + Similarly, qDeleteAll() requires that the value type is a + non-const pointer type (for example, QWidget *). The value type + requirements are specified for each algorithm, and the compiler + will produce an error if a requirement isn't met. + + \target binaryFind example + + The generic algorithms can be used on other container classes + than those provided by Qt and STL. The syntax of STL-style + iterators is modeled after C++ pointers, so it's possible to use + plain arrays as containers and plain pointers as iterators. A + common idiom is to use qBinaryFind() together with two static + arrays: one that contains a list of keys, and another that + contains a list of associated values. For example, the following + code will look up an HTML entity (e.g., \c &) in the \c + name_table array and return the corresponding Unicode value from + the \c value_table if the entity is recognized: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 2 + + This kind of code is for advanced users only; for most + applications, a QMap- or QHash-based approach would work just as + well: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 3 + + \section1 Types of Iterators + + The algorithms have certain requirements on the iterator types + they accept, and these are specified individually for each + function. The compiler will produce an error if a requirement + isn't met. + + \section2 Input Iterators + + An \e{input iterator} is an iterator that can be used for reading + data sequentially from a container. It must provide the following + operators: \c{==} and \c{!=} for comparing two iterators, unary + \c{*} for retrieving the value stored in the item, and prefix + \c{++} for advancing to the next item. + + The Qt containers' iterator types (const and non-const) are all + input iterators. + + \section2 Output Iterators + + An \e{output iterator} is an iterator that can be used for + writing data sequentially to a container or to some output + stream. It must provide the following operators: unary \c{*} for + writing a value (i.e., \c{*it = val}) and prefix \c{++} for + advancing to the next item. + + The Qt containers' non-const iterator types are all output + iterators. + + \section2 Forward Iterators + + A \e{forward iterator} is an iterator that meets the requirements + of both input iterators and output iterators. + + The Qt containers' non-const iterator types are all forward + iterators. + + \section2 Bidirectional Iterators + + A \e{bidirectional iterator} is an iterator that meets the + requirements of forward iterators but that in addition supports + prefix \c{--} for iterating backward. + + The Qt containers' non-const iterator types are all bidirectional + iterators. + + \section2 Random Access Iterators + + The last category, \e{random access iterators}, is the most + powerful type of iterator. It supports all the requirements of a + bidirectional iterator, and supports the following operations: + + \table + \row \i \c{i += n} \i advances iterator \c i by \c n positions + \row \i \c{i -= n} \i moves iterator \c i back by \c n positions + \row \i \c{i + n} or \c{n + i} \i returns the iterator for the item \c + n positions ahead of iterator \c i + \row \i \c{i - n} \i returns the iterator for the item \c n positions behind of iterator \c i + \row \i \c{i - j} \i returns the number of items between iterators \c i and \c j + \row \i \c{i[n]} \i same as \c{*(i + n)} + \row \i \c{i < j} \i returns true if iterator \c j comes after iterator \c i + \endtable + + QList and QVector's non-const iterator types are random access iterators. + + \sa {container classes}, <QtGlobal> +*/ + +/*! \fn OutputIterator qCopy(InputIterator begin1, InputIterator end1, OutputIterator begin2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Copies the items from range [\a begin1, \a end1) to range [\a + begin2, ...), in the order in which they appear. + + The item at position \a begin1 is assigned to that at position \a + begin2; the item at position \a begin1 + 1 is assigned to that at + position \a begin2 + 1; and so on. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 4 + + \sa qCopyBackward(), {input iterators}, {output iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn BiIterator2 qCopyBackward(BiIterator1 begin1, BiIterator1 end1, BiIterator2 end2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Copies the items from range [\a begin1, \a end1) to range [..., + \a end2). + + The item at position \a end1 - 1 is assigned to that at position + \a end2 - 1; the item at position \a end1 - 2 is assigned to that + at position \a end2 - 2; and so on. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 5 + + \sa qCopy(), {bidirectional iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn bool qEqual(InputIterator1 begin1, InputIterator1 end1, InputIterator2 begin2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Compares the items in the range [\a begin1, \a end1) with the + items in the range [\a begin2, ...). Returns true if all the + items compare equal; otherwise returns false. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 6 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + QString) to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa {input iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qFill(ForwardIterator begin, ForwardIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Fills the range [\a begin, \a end) with \a value. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 7 + + \sa qCopy(), {forward iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qFill(Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qFill(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), \a value); +*/ + +/*! \fn InputIterator qFind(InputIterator begin, InputIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns an iterator to the first occurrence of \a value in a + container in the range [\a begin, \a end). Returns \a end if \a + value isn't found. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 8 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + QString) to implement \c operator==(). + + If the items in the range are in ascending order, you can get + faster results by using qLowerBound() or qBinaryFind() instead of + qFind(). + + \sa qBinaryFind(), {input iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qFind(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qFind(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value); +*/ + +/*! \fn void qCount(InputIterator begin, InputIterator end, const T &value, Size &n) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns the number of occurrences of \a value in the range [\a begin, \a end), + which is returned in \a n. \a n is never initialized, the count is added to \a n. + It is the caller's responsibility to initialize \a n. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 9 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c int) to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa {input iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qCount(const Container &container, const T &value, Size &n) +\relates <QtAlgorithms> + +\overload + +Instead of operating on iterators, as in the other overload, this function +operates on the specified \a container to obtain the number of instances +of \a value in the variable passed as a reference in argument \a n. +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSwap(T &var1, T &var2) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Exchanges the values of variables \a var1 and \a var2. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 10 +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Sorts the items in range [\a begin, \a end) in ascending order + using the quicksort algorithm. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 11 + + The sort algorithm is efficient on large data sets. It operates + in \l {linear-logarithmic time}, O(\e{n} log \e{n}). + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. It is then undefined which one of the two + items will appear before the other after the sort. + + \sa qStableSort(), {random access iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + For example, here's how to sort the strings in a QStringList + in case-insensitive alphabetical order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 12 + + To sort values in reverse order, pass + \l{qGreater()}{qGreater<T>()} as the \a lessThan parameter. For + example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 13 + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. It is then undefined which one of the two + items will appear before the other after the sort. + + An alternative to using qSort() is to put the items to sort in a + QMap, using the sort key as the QMap key. This is often more + convenient than defining a \a lessThan function. For example, the + following code shows how to sort a list of strings case + insensitively using QMap: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 14 + + \sa QMap +*/ + +/*! \fn void qSort(Container &container) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qSort(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end()); +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qStableSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Sorts the items in range [\a begin, \a end) in ascending order + using a stable sorting algorithm. + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. The item that appeared before the other in the + original container will still appear first after the sort. This + property is often useful when sorting user-visible data. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 15 + + The sort algorithm is efficient on large data sets. It operates + in \l {linear-logarithmic time}, O(\e{n} log \e{n}). + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + \sa qSort(), {random access iterators} +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qStableSort(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + For example, here's how to sort the strings in a QStringList + in case-insensitive alphabetical order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 16 + + Note that earlier versions of Qt allowed using a lessThan function that took its + arguments by non-const reference. From 4.3 and on this is no longer possible, + the arguments has to be passed by const reference or value. + + To sort values in reverse order, pass + \l{qGreater()}{qGreater<T>()} as the \a lessThan parameter. For + example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 17 + + If neither of the two items is "less than" the other, the items are + taken to be equal. The item that appeared before the other in the + original container will still appear first after the sort. This + property is often useful when sorting user-visible data. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qStableSort(Container &container) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qStableSort(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end()); +*/ + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qLowerBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Performs a binary search of the range [\a begin, \a end) and + returns the position of the first ocurrence of \a value. If no + such item is found, returns the position where it should be + inserted. + + The items in the range [\a begin, \e end) must be sorted in + ascending order; see qSort(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 18 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + qLowerBound() can be used in conjunction with qUpperBound() to + iterate over all occurrences of the same value: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 19 + + \sa qUpperBound(), qBinaryFind() +*/ + +/*! + \fn RandomAccessIterator qLowerBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + Note that the items in the range must be sorted according to the order + specified by the \a lessThan object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qLowerBound(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + For read-only iteration over containers, this function is broadly equivalent to + qLowerBound(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value). However, since it + returns a const iterator, you cannot use it to modify the container; for example, + to insert items. +*/ + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qUpperBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Performs a binary search of the range [\a begin, \a end) and + returns the position of the one-past-the-last occurrence of \a + value. If no such item is found, returns the position where the + item should be inserted. + + The items in the range [\a begin, \e end) must be sorted in + ascending order; see qSort(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 20 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + \c{int}) to implement \c operator<(). + + qUpperBound() can be used in conjunction with qLowerBound() to + iterate over all occurrences of the same value: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 21 + + \sa qLowerBound(), qBinaryFind() +*/ + +/*! + \fn RandomAccessIterator qUpperBound(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + Note that the items in the range must be sorted according to the order + specified by the \a lessThan object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qUpperBound(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qUpperBound(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value); +*/ + + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qBinaryFind(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Performs a binary search of the range [\a begin, \a end) and + returns the position of an occurrence of \a value. If there are + no occurrences of \a value, returns \a end. + + The items in the range [\a begin, \a end) must be sorted in + ascending order; see qSort(). + + If there are many occurrences of the same value, any one of them + could be returned. Use qLowerBound() or qUpperBound() if you need + finer control. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 22 + + This function requires the item type (in the example above, + QString) to implement \c operator<(). + + See the \l{<QtAlgorithms>#binaryFind example}{detailed + description} for an example usage. + + \sa qLowerBound(), qUpperBound(), {random access iterators} +*/ + +/*! \fn RandomAccessIterator qBinaryFind(RandomAccessIterator begin, RandomAccessIterator end, const T &value, LessThan lessThan) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + Uses the \a lessThan function instead of \c operator<() to + compare the items. + + Note that the items in the range must be sorted according to the order + specified by the \a lessThan object. +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qBinaryFind(const Container &container, const T &value) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qBinaryFind(\a{container}.begin(), \a{container}.end(), value); +*/ + + +/*! + \fn void qDeleteAll(ForwardIterator begin, ForwardIterator end) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Deletes all the items in the range [\a begin, \a end) using the + C++ \c delete operator. The item type must be a pointer type (for + example, \c{QWidget *}). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 23 + + Notice that qDeleteAll() doesn't remove the items from the + container; it merely calls \c delete on them. In the example + above, we call clear() on the container to remove the items. + + This function can also be used to delete items stored in + associative containers, such as QMap and QHash. Only the objects + stored in each container will be deleted by this function; objects + used as keys will not be deleted. + + \sa {forward iterators} +*/ + +/*! + \fn void qDeleteAll(const Container &c) + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + \overload + + This is the same as qDeleteAll(\a{c}.begin(), \a{c}.end()). +*/ + +/*! \fn LessThan qLess() + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns a functional object, or functor, that can be passed to qSort() + or qStableSort(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 24 + + \sa {qGreater()}{qGreater<T>()} +*/ + +/*! \fn LessThan qGreater() + \relates <QtAlgorithms> + + Returns a functional object, or functor, that can be passed to qSort() + or qStableSort(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qalgorithms.qdoc 25 + + \sa {qLess()}{qLess<T>()} +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp index 9600579..316aab7 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearray.cpp @@ -594,8 +594,8 @@ QByteArray::Data QByteArray::shared_empty = { Q_BASIC_ATOMIC_INITIALIZER(1), \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + \reentrant QByteArray can be used to store both raw bytes (including '\\0's) diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp index 1c10a4f..37cb9bb 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qbytearraymatcher.cpp @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ static inline int bm_find(const uchar *cc, int l, int index, const uchar *puc, u can be quickly matched in a byte array. \ingroup tools - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing This class is useful when you have a sequence of bytes that you want to repeatedly match against some byte arrays (perhaps in a diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qcache.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qcache.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c008fa --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qcache.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,244 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QCache + \brief The QCache class is a template class that provides a cache. + + \ingroup tools + \ingroup shared + + \reentrant + + QCache\<Key, T\> defines a cache that stores objects of type T + associated with keys of type Key. For example, here's the + definition of a cache that stores objects of type Employee + associated with an integer key: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qcache.qdoc 0 + + Here's how to insert an object in the cache: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qcache.qdoc 1 + + The advantage of using QCache over some other key-based data + structure (such as QMap or QHash) is that QCache automatically + takes ownership of the objects that are inserted into the cache and + deletes them to make room for new objects, if necessary. When + inserting an object into the cache, you can specify a \e{cost}, + which should bear some approximate relationship to the amount of + memory taken by the object. When the sum of all objects' costs + (totalCost()) exceeds the cache's limit (maxCost()), QCache starts + deleting objects in the cache to keep under the limit, starting with + less recently accessed objects. + + By default, QCache's maxCost() is 100. You can specify a + different value in the QCache constructor: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qcache.qdoc 2 + + Each time you call insert(), you can specify a cost as third + argument (after the key and a pointer to the object to insert). + After the call, the inserted object is owned by the QCache, which + may delete it at any time to make room for other objects. + + To look up objects in the cache, use object() or + operator[](). This function looks up an object by its key, and + returns either a pointer to the cached object (which is owned by + the cache) or 0. + + If you want to remove an object from the cache for a particular key, + call remove(). This will also delete the object. If you want to + remove an object from the cache without the QCache deleting it, use + take(). + + \sa QPixmapCache, QHash, QMap +*/ + +/*! \fn QCache::QCache(int maxCost = 100) + + Constructs a cache whose contents will never have a total cost + greater than \a maxCost. +*/ + +/*! \fn QCache::~QCache() + + Destroys the cache. Deletes all the objects in the cache. +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::maxCost() const + + Returns the maximum allowed total cost of the cache. + + \sa setMaxCost(), totalCost() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QCache::setMaxCost(int cost) + + Sets the maximum allowed total cost of the cache to \a cost. If + the current total cost is greater than \a cost, some objects are + deleted immediately. + + \sa maxCost(), totalCost() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::totalCost() const + + Returns the total cost of the objects in the cache. + + This value is normally below maxCost(), but QCache makes an + exception for Qt's \l{implicitly shared} classes. If a cached + object shares its internal data with another instance, QCache may + keep the object lying around, possibly contributing to making + totalCost() larger than maxCost(). + + \sa setMaxCost() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::size() const + + Returns the number of objects in the cache. + + \sa isEmpty() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QCache::count() const + + Same as size(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QCache::isEmpty() const + + Returns true if the cache contains no objects; otherwise + returns false. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! \fn QList<Key> QCache::keys() const + + Returns a list of the keys in the cache. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QCache::clear(); + + Deletes all the objects in the cache. + + \sa remove(), take() +*/ + + +/*! \fn bool QCache::insert(const Key &key, T *object, int cost = 1) + + Inserts \a object into the cache with key \a key and + associated cost \a cost. Any object with the same key already in + the cache will be removed. + + After this call, \a object is owned by the QCache and may be + deleted at any time. In particular, if \a cost is greater than + maxCost(), the object will be deleted immediately. + + The function returns true if the object was inserted into the + cache; otherwise it returns false. + + \sa take(), remove() +*/ + +/*! \fn T *QCache::object(const Key &key) const + + Returns the object associated with key \a key, or 0 if the key does + not exist in the cache. + + \warning The returned object is owned by QCache and may be + deleted at any time. + + \sa take(), remove() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QCache::contains(const Key &key) const + + Returns true if the cache contains an object associated with key \a + key; otherwise returns false. + + \sa take(), remove() +*/ + +/*! \fn T *QCache::operator[](const Key &key) const + + Returns the object associated with key \a key, or 0 if the key does + not exist in the cache. + + This is the same as object(). + + \warning The returned object is owned by QCache and may be + deleted at any time. +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QCache::remove(const Key &key) + + Deletes the object associated with key \a key. Returns true if the + object was found in the cache; otherwise returns false. + + \sa take(), clear() +*/ + +/*! \fn T *QCache::take(const Key &key) + + Takes the object associated with key \a key out of the cache + without deleting it. Returns a pointer to the object taken out, or + 0 if the key does not exist in the cache. + + The ownership of the returned object is passed to the caller. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QCache::QCache(int maxCost, int dummy) + + Use QCache(int) instead. +*/ + +/*! + \fn T *QCache::find(const Key &key) const + + Use object() instead. +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp index ab84603..e9f9552 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qchar.cpp @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QLatin1Char \brief The QLatin1Char class provides an 8-bit ASCII/Latin-1 character. - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing This class is only useful to avoid the codec for C strings business in the QChar(ch) constructor. You can avoid it by writing @@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \class QChar \brief The QChar class provides a 16-bit Unicode character. - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant In Qt, Unicode characters are 16-bit entities without any markup diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp index 0758afa..8b9d202 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qdatetime.cpp @@ -193,8 +193,6 @@ static QString fmtDateTime(const QString& f, const QTime* dt = 0, const QDate* d \reentrant \brief The QDate class provides date functions. - \ingroup time - \mainclass A QDate object contains a calendar date, i.e. year, month, and day numbers, in the Gregorian calendar. (see \l{QDate G and J} {Use of @@ -1411,8 +1409,6 @@ void QDate::julianToGregorian(uint jd, int &y, int &m, int &d) \brief The QTime class provides clock time functions. - \ingroup time - \mainclass A QTime object contains a clock time, i.e. the number of hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds since midnight. It can read the @@ -2075,8 +2071,6 @@ int QTime::elapsed() const \reentrant \brief The QDateTime class provides date and time functions. - \ingroup time - \mainclass A QDateTime object contains a calendar date and a clock time (a "datetime"). It is a combination of the QDate and QTime classes. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qeasingcurve.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qeasingcurve.cpp index 5cc8080..e84e3f0 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qeasingcurve.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qeasingcurve.cpp @@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ #ifndef QT_NO_DEBUG_STREAM #include <QtCore/qdebug.h> -#include <QtCore/QString> +#include <QtCore/qstring.h> #endif QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp index 308ba23..8bc9f29 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qhash.cpp @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ void QHashData::checkSanity() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QHash\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It @@ -1672,7 +1672,7 @@ void QHashData::checkSanity() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QMultiHash\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qiterator.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qiterator.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c767be3 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qiterator.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,1431 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QListIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QList and QQueue. + + QList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QList member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, modify, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QList\<T\> (or a + QQueue\<T\>). If you want to modify the list as you iterate over + it, use QMutableListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QListIterator constructor takes a QList as argument. After + construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning of + the list (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over all + the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 0 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, and returns the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 1 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same list. If the list is + modified while a QListIterator is active, the QListIterator will + continue iterating over the original list, ignoring the modified + copy. + + \sa QMutableListIterator, QList::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QLinkedListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QLinkedListIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QLinkedList. + + QLinkedList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and + \l{STL-style iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more + high-level and easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the + other hand, they are slightly less efficient. + + QLinkedListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a + QLinkedList\<T\>. If you want to modify the list as you iterate + over it, use QMutableLinkedListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QLinkedListIterator constructor takes a QLinkedList as + argument. After construction, the iterator is located at the very + beginning of the list (before the first item). Here's how to + iterate over all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 2 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, and returns the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 3 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same list. If the list is + modified while a QLinkedListIterator is active, the + QLinkedListIterator will continue iterating over the original + list, ignoring the modified copy. + + \sa QMutableLinkedListIterator, QLinkedList::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QVectorIterator + \inmodule QtCore + \brief The QVectorIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QVector and QStack. + + QVector has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QVector member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, insert, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QVectorIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QVector\<T\> + (or a QStack\<T\>). If you want to modify the vector as you + iterate over it, use QMutableVectorIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QVectorIterator constructor takes a QVector as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the vector (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 4 + + The next() function returns the next item in the vector and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 5 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same vector. If the vector + is modified while a QVectorIterator is active, the QVectorIterator + will continue iterating over the original vector, ignoring the + modified copy. + + \sa QMutableVectorIterator, QVector::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QSetIterator + \inmodule QtCore + \brief The QSetIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QSet. + + QSet supports both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QSetIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QSet\<T\>. If you + want to modify the set as you iterate over it, use + QMutableSetIterator\<T\> instead. + + The constructor takes a QSet as argument. After construction, the + iterator is located at the very beginning of the set (before + the first item). Here's how to iterate over all the elements + sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 6 + + The next() function returns the next item in the set and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 7 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same set. If the set + is modified while a QSetIterator is active, the QSetIterator + will continue iterating over the original set, ignoring the + modified copy. + + \sa QMutableSetIterator, QSet::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableListIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QList and QQueue. + + QList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QList member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, insert, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QMutableListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QList\<T\> + (or a QQueue\<T\>) and modify the list. If you don't want to + modify the list (or have a const QList), use the slightly faster + QListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableListIterator constructor takes a QList as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the list (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 8 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 9 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the list, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). If you want to insert a new item in the list, use + insert(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 10 + + The example traverses a list, replacing negative numbers with + their absolute values, and eliminating zeroes. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given list at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the list + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QListIterator, QList::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableLinkedListIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableLinkedListIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QLinkedList. + + QLinkedList has both \l{Java-style iterators} and + \l{STL-style iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more + high-level and easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the + other hand, they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableLinkedListIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a + QLinkedList\<T\> and modify the list. If you don't want to modify + the list (or have a const QLinkedList), use the slightly faster + QLinkedListIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableLinkedListIterator constructor takes a QLinkedList as + argument. After construction, the iterator is located at the very + beginning of the list (before the first item). Here's how to + iterate over all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 11 + + The next() function returns the next item in the list and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 12 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the list, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). If you want to insert a new item in the list, use + insert(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 13 + + The example traverses a list, replacing negative numbers with + their absolute values, and eliminating zeroes. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given list at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the list + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QLinkedListIterator, QLinkedList::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableVectorIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableVectorIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QVector and QStack. + + QVector has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + An alternative to using iterators is to use index positions. Most + QVector member functions take an index as their first parameter, + making it possible to access, insert, and remove items without + using iterators. + + QMutableVectorIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a + QVector\<T\> and modify the vector. If you don't want to modify + the vector (or have a const QVector), use the slightly faster + QVectorIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableVectorIterator constructor takes a QVector as + argument. After construction, the iterator is located at the very + beginning of the list (before the first item). Here's how to + iterate over all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 14 + + The next() function returns the next item in the vector and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 15 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the vector, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). If you want to insert a new item in the vector, use + insert(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 16 + + The example traverses a vector, replacing negative numbers with + their absolute values, and eliminating zeroes. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given vector at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the + vector while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QVectorIterator, QVector::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableSetIterator + \inmodule QtCore + \since 4.2 + + \brief The QMutableSetIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QSet. + + QSet has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableSetIterator\<T\> allows you to iterate over a QSet\<T\> + and remove items from the set as you iterate. If you don't want + to modify the set (or have a const QSet), use the slightly faster + QSetIterator\<T\> instead. + + The QMutableSetIterator constructor takes a QSet as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the set (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 17 + + The next() function returns the next item in the set and + advances the iterator. Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style + iterators point \e between items rather than directly \e at + items. The first call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the first and second item, and returns the first + item; the second call to next() advances the iterator to the + position between the second and third item, returning the second + item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 18 + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the set, use + remove(). + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given set at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the set + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QSetIterator, QSet::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \fn QListIterator::QListIterator(const QList<T> &list) + \fn QLinkedListIterator::QLinkedListIterator(const QLinkedList<T> &list) + \fn QMutableListIterator::QMutableListIterator(QList<T> &list) + \fn QMutableLinkedListIterator::QMutableLinkedListIterator(QLinkedList<T> &list) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a list. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the list (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QVectorIterator::QVectorIterator(const QVector<T> &vector) + \fn QMutableVectorIterator::QMutableVectorIterator(QVector<T> &vector) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a vector. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the vector (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSetIterator::QSetIterator(const QSet<T> &set) + \fn QMutableSetIterator::QMutableSetIterator(QSet<T> &set) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a set. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the set (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QMutableListIterator::~QMutableListIterator() + \fn QMutableLinkedListIterator::~QMutableLinkedListIterator() + \fn QMutableVectorIterator::~QMutableVectorIterator() + \fn QMutableSetIterator::~QMutableSetIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableListIterator &QMutableListIterator::operator=(QList<T> &list) + \fn QMutableLinkedListIterator &QMutableLinkedListIterator::operator=(QLinkedList<T> &list) + \fn QListIterator &QListIterator::operator=(const QList<T> &list) + \fn QLinkedListIterator &QLinkedListIterator::operator=(const QLinkedList<T> &list) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a list. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the list (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn QVectorIterator &QVectorIterator::operator=(const QVector<T> &vector) + \fn QMutableVectorIterator &QMutableVectorIterator::operator=(QVector<T> &vector) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a vector. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the vector (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSetIterator &QSetIterator::operator=(const QSet<T> &set) + \fn QMutableSetIterator &QMutableSetIterator::operator=(QSet<T> &set) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a set. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the set (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QLinkedListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QVectorIterator::toFront() + \fn void QSetIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableSetIterator::toFront() + + Moves the iterator to the front of the container (before the + first item). + + \sa toBack(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QLinkedListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QVectorIterator::toBack() + \fn void QSetIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableSetIterator::toBack() + + Moves the iterator to the back of the container (after the last + item). + + \sa toFront(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QVectorIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QSetIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::hasNext() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item ahead of the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the back of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::next() + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::next() + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::next() + \fn const T &QSetIterator::next() + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::next() + + Returns the next item and advances the iterator by one position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::next() + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::next() + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::next() + + Returns a reference to the next item, and advances the iterator + by one position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QSetIterator::peekNext() const + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns the next item without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::peekNext() const + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns a reference to the next item, without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QVectorIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QSetIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::hasPrevious() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item behind the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the front of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QSetIterator::previous() + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::previous() + + Returns the previous item and moves the iterator back by one + position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::previous() + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::previous() + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::previous() + + Returns a reference to the previous item and moves the iterator + back by one position. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QLinkedListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QVectorIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QSetIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns the previous item without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QMutableListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns a reference to the previous item, without moving the iterator. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QVectorIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QSetIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::findNext(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + forward. Returns true if \a value is found; otherwise returns false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just after the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the back of the container. + + \sa findPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QLinkedListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QVectorIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QSetIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableLinkedListIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableVectorIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableSetIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + backward. Returns true if \a value is found; otherwise returns + false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just before the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the front of the container. + + \sa findNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableListIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 19 + + \sa insert(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 20 + + \sa insert(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 21 + + \sa insert(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableSetIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 22 + + \sa value() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableListIterator::setValue(const T &value) const + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 23 + + \sa value(), remove(), insert() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::setValue(const T &value) const + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 24 + + \sa value(), remove(), insert() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::setValue(const T &value) const + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 25 + + \sa value(), remove(), insert() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QMutableListIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableVectorIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableSetIterator::value() const + + Returns the value of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), value() is equivalent to + peekPrevious(). After a call to previous() or findPrevious(), value() is + equivalent to peekNext(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn T &QMutableListIterator::value() + \fn T &QMutableLinkedListIterator::value() + \fn T &QMutableVectorIterator::value() + \overload + + Returns a non-const reference to the value of the last item that + was jumped over using one of the traversal functions. +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableListIterator::insert(const T &value) + \fn void QMutableLinkedListIterator::insert(const T &value) + \fn void QMutableVectorIterator::insert(const T &value) + + Inserts \a value at the current iterator position. After the + call, the iterator is located just after the inserted item. + + \sa remove(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! + \class QMapIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMapIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QMap and QMultiMap. + + QMap has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMapIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QMap (or a + QMultiMap). If you want to modify the map as you iterate over + it, use QMutableMapIterator instead. + + The QMapIterator constructor takes a QMap as argument. After + construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning of + the map (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over all + the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 26 + + The next() function returns the next item in the map and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 27 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 28 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same map. If the map is + modified while a QMapIterator is active, the QMapIterator will + continue iterating over the original map, ignoring the modified + copy. + + \sa QMutableMapIterator, QMap::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QHashIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QHashIterator class provides a Java-style const iterator for QHash and QMultiHash. + + QHash has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QHashIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QHash (or a + QMultiHash). If you want to modify the hash as you iterate over + it, use QMutableHashIterator instead. + + The QHashIterator constructor takes a QHash as argument. After + construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning of + the hash (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over all + the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 29 + + The next() function returns the next item in the hash and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 30 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 31 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same hash. If the hash is + modified while a QHashIterator is active, the QHashIterator will + continue iterating over the original hash, ignoring the modified + copy. + + \sa QMutableHashIterator, QHash::const_iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableMapIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableMapIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QMap and QMultiMap. + + QMap has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableMapIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QMap + (or a QMultiMap) and modify the map. If you don't want to modify + the map (or have a const QMap), use the slightly faster + QMapIterator instead. + + The QMutableMapIterator constructor takes a QMap as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the map (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 32 + + The next() function returns the next item in the map and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 33 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 34 + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the map, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 35 + + The example removes all (key, value) pairs where the key and the + value are the same. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given map at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the map + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QMapIterator, QMap::iterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QMutableHashIterator + \inmodule QtCore + + \brief The QMutableHashIterator class provides a Java-style non-const iterator for QHash and QMultiHash. + + QHash has both \l{Java-style iterators} and \l{STL-style + iterators}. The Java-style iterators are more high-level and + easier to use than the STL-style iterators; on the other hand, + they are slightly less efficient. + + QMutableHashIterator\<Key, T\> allows you to iterate over a QHash + (or a QMultiHash) and modify the hash. If you don't want to modify + the hash (or have a const QHash), use the slightly faster + QHashIterator instead. + + The QMutableHashIterator constructor takes a QHash as argument. + After construction, the iterator is located at the very beginning + of the hash (before the first item). Here's how to iterate over + all the elements sequentially: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 36 + + The next() function returns the next item in the hash and + advances the iterator. The key() and value() functions return the + key and value of the last item that was jumped over. + + Unlike STL-style iterators, Java-style iterators point \e between + items rather than directly \e at items. The first call to next() + advances the iterator to the position between the first and + second item, and returns the first item; the second call to + next() advances the iterator to the position between the second + and third item; and so on. + + \img javaiterators1.png + + Here's how to iterate over the elements in reverse order: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 37 + + If you want to find all occurrences of a particular value, use + findNext() or findPrevious() in a loop. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 38 + + If you want to remove items as you iterate over the hash, use + remove(). If you want to modify the value of an item, use + setValue(). + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qiterator.qdoc 39 + + The example removes all (key, value) pairs where the key and the + value are the same. + + Only one mutable iterator can be active on a given hash at any + time. Furthermore, no changes should be done directly to the hash + while the iterator is active (as opposed to through the + iterator), since this could invalidate the iterator and lead to + undefined behavior. + + \sa QHashIterator, QHash::iterator +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::QMapIterator(const QMap<Key, T> &map) + \fn QMutableMapIterator::QMutableMapIterator(QMap<Key, T> &map) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a map. The iterator is set + to be at the front of the map (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! \fn QHashIterator::QHashIterator(const QHash<Key, T> &hash) + \fn QMutableHashIterator::QMutableHashIterator(QHash<Key, T> &hash) + + Constructs an iterator for traversing \a hash. The iterator is + set to be at the front of the hash (before the first item). + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QMutableMapIterator::~QMutableMapIterator() + \fn QMutableHashIterator::~QMutableHashIterator() + + Destroys the iterator. + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator &QMapIterator::operator=(const QMap<Key, T> &map) + \fn QMutableMapIterator &QMutableMapIterator::operator=(QMap<Key, T> &map) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a map. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the map (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn QHashIterator &QHashIterator::operator=(const QHash<Key, T> &hash) + \fn QMutableHashIterator &QMutableHashIterator::operator=(QHash<Key, T> &hash) + + Makes the iterator operate on \a hash. The iterator is set to be + at the front of the hash (before the first item). + + \sa toFront(), toBack() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMapIterator::toFront() + \fn void QHashIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableMapIterator::toFront() + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::toFront() + + Moves the iterator to the front of the container (before the + first item). + + \sa toBack(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMapIterator::toBack() + \fn void QHashIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableMapIterator::toBack() + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::toBack() + + Moves the iterator to the back of the container (after the last + item). + + \sa toFront(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QHashIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::hasNext() const + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::hasNext() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item ahead of the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the back of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::next() + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::next() + + Returns the next item and advances the iterator by one position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::next() + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::next() + + Returns the next item and advances the iterator by one position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), peekNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::peekNext() const + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns the next item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::peekNext() const + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::peekNext() const + + Returns a reference to the next item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the back of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasNext(), next(), peekPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QHashIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::hasPrevious() const + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::hasPrevious() const + + Returns true if there is at least one item behind the iterator, + i.e. the iterator is \e not at the front of the container; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa hasNext(), previous() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::previous() + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::previous() + + Returns the previous item and moves the iterator back by one + position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::previous() + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::previous() + + Returns the previous item and moves the iterator back by one + position. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), peekPrevious(), next() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMapIterator::Item QMapIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn QHashIterator::Item QHashIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns the previous item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn QMutableMapIterator::Item QMutableMapIterator::peekPrevious() const + \fn QMutableHashIterator::Item QMutableHashIterator::peekPrevious() const + + Returns the previous item without moving the iterator. + + Call key() on the return value to obtain the item's key, and + value() to obtain the value. + + Calling this function on an iterator located at the front of the + container leads to undefined results. + + \sa hasPrevious(), previous(), peekNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QMapIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QHashIterator::value() const + + Returns the value of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), value() is + equivalent to peekPrevious().value(). After a call to previous() + or findPrevious(), value() is equivalent to peekNext().value(). + + \sa key() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T &QMutableMapIterator::value() const + \fn const T &QMutableHashIterator::value() const + + Returns the value of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), value() is + equivalent to peekPrevious().value(). After a call to previous() + or findPrevious(), value() is equivalent to peekNext().value(). + + \sa key(), setValue() +*/ + +/*! + \fn T &QMutableMapIterator::value() + \fn T &QMutableHashIterator::value() + \overload + + Returns a non-const reference to the value of + the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions. +*/ + +/*! \fn const Key &QMapIterator::key() const + \fn const Key &QHashIterator::key() const + \fn const Key &QMutableMapIterator::key() const + \fn const Key &QMutableHashIterator::key() const + + Returns the key of the last item that was jumped over using one + of the traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), + findPrevious()). + + After a call to next() or findNext(), key() is + equivalent to peekPrevious().key(). After a call to previous() or + findPrevious(), key() is equivalent to peekNext().key(). + + \sa value() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QHashIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::findNext(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::findNext(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + forward. Returns true if a (key, value) pair with value \a value + is found; otherwise returns false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just after the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the back of the container. + + \sa findPrevious() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QMapIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QHashIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableMapIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + \fn bool QMutableHashIterator::findPrevious(const T &value) + + Searches for \a value starting from the current iterator position + backward. Returns true if a (key, value) pair with value \a value + is found; otherwise returns false. + + After the call, if \a value was found, the iterator is positioned + just before the matching item; otherwise, the iterator is + positioned at the front of the container. + + \sa findNext() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableMapIterator::remove() + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::remove() + + Removes the last item that was jumped over using one of the + traversal functions (next(), previous(), findNext(), findPrevious()). + + \sa setValue() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QMutableMapIterator::setValue(const T &value) + \fn void QMutableHashIterator::setValue(const T &value) + + Replaces the value of the last item that was jumped over using + one of the traversal functions with \a value. + + The traversal functions are next(), previous(), findNext(), and + findPrevious(). + + \sa key(), value(), remove() +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp index e6ad9d1..02c1128 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qline.cpp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QLine - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QLine class provides a two-dimensional vector using integer precision. @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &stream, QLine &line) /*! \class QLineF - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QLineF class provides a two-dimensional vector using floating point precision. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp index e5c0145..39758ed 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qlinkedlist.cpp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ QLinkedListData QLinkedListData::shared_null = { \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QLinkedList\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qlistdata.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qlist.cpp index be57359..d954160 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qlistdata.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qlist.cpp @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ void **QListData::erase(void **xi) \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QList\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp index 7c4d0c0..0881671 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qlocale.cpp @@ -1479,9 +1479,9 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &ds, QLocale &l) \reentrant \ingroup i18n - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \ingroup shared - \mainclass + QLocale is initialized with a language/country pair in its constructor and offers number-to-string and string-to-number diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp index ed33764..e913232 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qmap.cpp @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ void QMapData::dump() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QMap\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ void QMapData::dump() \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QMultiMap\<Key, T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qpair.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qpair.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c8ac89 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qpair.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,229 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QPair + \brief The QPair class is a template class that stores a pair of items. + + \ingroup tools + + QPair\<T1, T2\> can be used in your application if the STL \c + pair type is not available. It stores one value of type T1 and + one value of type T2. It can be used as a return value for a + function that needs to return two values, or as the value type of + a \l{generic container}. + + Here's an example of a QPair that stores one QString and one \c + double value: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qpair.qdoc 0 + + The components are accessible as public data members called \l + first and \l second. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qpair.qdoc 1 + + QPair's template data types (T1 and T2) must be \l{assignable + data types}. You cannot, for example, store a QWidget as a value; + instead, store a QWidget *. A few functions have additional + requirements; these requirements are documented on a per-function + basis. + + \sa {Generic Containers} +*/ + +/*! \typedef QPair::first_type + + The type of the first element in the pair (T1). + + \sa first +*/ + +/*! \typedef QPair::second_type + + The type of the second element in the pair (T2). + + \sa second +*/ + +/*! \variable QPair::first + + The first element in the pair. +*/ + +/*! \variable QPair::second + + The second element in the pair. +*/ + +/*! \fn QPair::QPair() + + Constructs an empty pair. The \c first and \c second elements are + initialized with \l{default-constructed values}. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPair::QPair(const T1 &value1, const T2 &value2) + + Constructs a pair and initializes the \c first element with \a + value1 and the \c second element with \a value2. + + \sa qMakePair() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPair<T1, T2> &QPair::operator=(const QPair<T1, T2> &other) + + Assigns \a other to this pair. +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator==(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is equal to \a p2; otherwise returns false. + Two pairs compare equal if their \c first data members compare + equal and if their \c second data members compare equal. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator==(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator!=(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is not equal to \a p2; otherwise returns + false. Two pairs compare as not equal if their \c first data + members are not equal or if their \c second data members are not + equal. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator==(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator<(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is less than \a p2; otherwise returns + false. The comparison is done on the \c first members of \a p1 + and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second members are + compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator>(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is greater than \a p2; otherwise returns + false. The comparison is done on the \c first members of \a p1 + and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second members are + compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator<=(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is less than or equal to \a p2; otherwise + returns false. The comparison is done on the \c first members of + \a p1 and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second members are + compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! \fn bool operator>=(const QPair<T1, T2> &p1, const QPair<T1, T2> &p2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns true if \a p1 is greater than or equal to \a p2; + otherwise returns false. The comparison is done on the \c first + members of \a p1 and \a p2; if they compare equal, the \c second + members are compared to break the tie. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to have an + implementation of \c operator<(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QPair<T1, T2> qMakePair(const T1 &value1, const T2 &value2) + + \relates QPair + + Returns a QPair\<T1, T2\> that contains \a value1 and \a value2. + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qpair.qdoc 2 + + This is equivalent to QPair<T1, T2>(\a value1, \a value2), but + usually requires less typing. +*/ + +/*! \fn QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &in, QPair<T1, T2> &pair) + + \relates QPair + + Reads a pair from stream \a in into \a pair. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to implement \c operator>>(). + + \sa {Format of the QDataStream operators} +*/ + +/*! \fn QDataStream &operator<<(QDataStream &out, const QPair<T1, T2> &pair) + + \relates QPair + + Writes the pair \a pair to stream \a out. + + This function requires the T1 and T2 types to implement \c operator<<(). + + \sa {Format of the QDataStream operators} +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp index cba7fef..7c05eaa 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qpoint.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QPoint - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPoint class defines a point in the plane using integer precision. @@ -380,7 +380,7 @@ QDebug operator<<(QDebug d, const QPointF &p) /*! \class QPointF - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QPointF class defines a point in the plane using floating point precision. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp index 108f103..1c1e6d2 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qqueue.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QQueue\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp index eb493f0..bdd09a2 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qrect.cpp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QRect - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QRect class defines a rectangle in the plane using integer precision. @@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ QDebug operator<<(QDebug dbg, const QRect &r) { /*! \class QRectF - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QRectF class defines a rectangle in the plane using floating point precision. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp index fd3b33e..ed7fe9e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qregexp.cpp @@ -83,9 +83,8 @@ int qFindString(const QChar *haystack, int haystackLen, int from, \brief The QRegExp class provides pattern matching using regular expressions. \ingroup tools - \ingroup misc \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \keyword regular expression A regular expression, or "regexp", is a pattern for matching diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qset.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qset.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55baa18 --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qset.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,953 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QSet + \brief The QSet class is a template class that provides a hash-table-based set. + + \ingroup tools + \ingroup shared + \reentrant + + + QSet<T> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It stores + values in an unspecified order and provides very fast lookup of + the values. Internally, QSet<T> is implemented as a QHash. + + Here's an example QSet with QString values: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 0 + + To insert a value into the set, use insert(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 1 + + Another way to insert items into the set is to use operator<<(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 2 + + To test whether an item belongs to the set or not, use contains(): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 3 + + If you want to navigate through all the values stored in a QSet, + you can use an iterator. QSet supports both \l{Java-style + iterators} (QSetIterator and QMutableSetIterator) and \l{STL-style + iterators} (QSet::iterator and QSet::const_iterator). Here's how + to iterate over a QSet<QWidget *> using a Java-style iterator: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 4 + + Here's the same code, but using an STL-style iterator: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 5 + + QSet is unordered, so an iterator's sequence cannot be assumed to + be predictable. If ordering by key is required, use a QMap. + + To navigate through a QSet, you can also use \l{foreach}: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 6 + + Items can be removed from the set using remove(). There is also a + clear() function that removes all items. + + QSet's value data type must be an \l{assignable data type}. You + cannot, for example, store a QWidget as a value; instead, store a + QWidget *. In addition, the type must provide \c operator==(), and + there must also be a global qHash() function that returns a hash + value for an argument of the key's type. See the QHash + documentation for a list of types supported by qHash(). + + Internally, QSet uses a hash table to perform lookups. The hash + table automatically grows and shrinks to provide fast lookups + without wasting memory. You can still control the size of the hash + table by calling reserve(), if you already know approximately how + many elements the QSet will contain, but this isn't necessary to + obtain good performance. You can also call capacity() to retrieve + the hash table's size. + + \sa QSetIterator, QMutableSetIterator, QHash, QMap +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::QSet() + + Constructs an empty set. + + \sa clear() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::QSet(const QSet<T> &other) + + Constructs a copy of \a other. + + This operation occurs in \l{constant time}, because QSet is + \l{implicitly shared}. This makes returning a QSet from a + function very fast. If a shared instance is modified, it will be + copied (copy-on-write), and this takes \l{linear time}. + + \sa operator=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Assigns the \a other set to this set and returns a reference to + this set. +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::operator==(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns true if the \a other set is equal to this set; otherwise + returns false. + + Two sets are considered equal if they contain the same elements. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa operator!=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::operator!=(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns true if the \a other set is not equal to this set; otherwise + returns false. + + Two sets are considered equal if they contain the same elements. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator==(). + + \sa operator==() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QSet::size() const + + Returns the number of items in the set. + + \sa isEmpty(), count() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::isEmpty() const + + Returns true if the set contains no elements; otherwise returns + false. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! + \fn int QSet::capacity() const + + Returns the number of buckets in the set's internal hash + table. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QSet's memory usage. In general, you will rarely ever need + to call this function. If you want to know how many items are in + the set, call size(). + + \sa reserve(), squeeze() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QSet::reserve(int size) + + Ensures that the set's internal hash table consists of at + least \a size buckets. + + This function is useful for code that needs to build a huge set + and wants to avoid repeated reallocation. For example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 7 + + Ideally, \a size should be slightly more than the maximum number + of elements expected in the set. \a size doesn't have to be prime, + because QSet will use a prime number internally anyway. If \a size + is an underestimate, the worst that will happen is that the QSet + will be a bit slower. + + In general, you will rarely ever need to call this function. + QSet's internal hash table automatically shrinks or grows to + provide good performance without wasting too much memory. + + \sa squeeze(), capacity() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::squeeze() + + Reduces the size of the set's internal hash table to save + memory. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QSet's memory usage. In general, you will rarely ever + need to call this function. + + \sa reserve(), capacity() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::detach() + + \internal + + Detaches this set from any other sets with which it may share + data. + + \sa isDetached() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QSet::isDetached() const + + \internal + + Returns true if the set's internal data isn't shared with any + other set object; otherwise returns false. + + \sa detach() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::setSharable(bool sharable) + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QSet::clear() + + Removes all elements from the set. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::remove(const T &value) + + Removes any occurrence of item \a value from the set. Returns + true if an item was actually removed; otherwise returns false. + + \sa contains(), insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::erase(iterator pos) + \since 4.2 + + Removes the item at the iterator position \a pos from the set, and + returns an iterator positioned at the next item in the set. + + Unlike remove(), this function never causes QSet to rehash its + internal data structure. This means that it can safely be called + while iterating, and won't affect the order of items in the set. + + \sa remove(), find() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::find(const T &value) const + \since 4.2 + + Returns a const iterator positioned at the item \a value in the + set. If the set contains no item \a value, the function returns + constEnd(). + + \sa constFind(), contains() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::iterator QSet::find(const T &value) + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Returns a non-const iterator positioned at the item \a value in + the set. If the set contains no item \a value, the function + returns end(). +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::constFind(const T &value) const + \since 4.2 + + Returns a const iterator positioned at the item \a value in the + set. If the set contains no item \a value, the function returns + constEnd(). + + \sa find(), contains() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::contains(const T &value) const + + Returns true if the set contains item \a value; otherwise returns + false. + + \sa insert(), remove(), find() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::contains(const QSet<T> &other) const + \since 4.6 + + Returns true if the set contains all items from the \a other set; + otherwise returns false. + + \sa insert(), remove(), find() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::begin() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the first + item in the set. + + \sa constBegin(), end() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::iterator QSet::begin() + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Returns a non-const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the first + item in the set. +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::constBegin() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the first + item in the set. + + \sa begin(), constEnd() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::end() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} positioned at the imaginary + item after the last item in the set. + + \sa constEnd(), begin() +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::iterator QSet::end() + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Returns a non-const \l{STL-style iterator} pointing to the + imaginary item after the last item in the set. +*/ + +/*! \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::constEnd() const + + Returns a const \l{STL-style iterator} pointing to the imaginary + item after the last item in the set. + + \sa constBegin(), end() +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::Iterator + \since 4.2 + + Qt-style synonym for QSet::iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::ConstIterator + + Qt-style synonym for QSet::const_iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::const_pointer + + Typedef for const T *. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::const_reference + + Typedef for const T &. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::difference_type + + Typedef for const ptrdiff_t. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::key_type + + Typedef for T. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::pointer + + Typedef for T *. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::reference + + Typedef for T &. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::size_type + + Typedef for int. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::value_type + + Typedef for T. Provided for STL compatibility. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::insert(const T &value) + + Inserts item \a value into the set, if \a value isn't already + in the set, and returns an iterator pointing at the inserted + item. + + \sa operator<<(), remove(), contains() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::unite(const QSet<T> &other) + + Each item in the \a other set that isn't already in this set is + inserted into this set. A reference to this set is returned. + + \sa operator|=(), intersect(), subtract() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::intersect(const QSet<T> &other) + + Removes all items from this set that are not contained in the + \a other set. A reference to this set is returned. + + \sa operator&=(), unite(), subtract() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::subtract(const QSet<T> &other) + + Removes all items from this set that are contained in the + \a other set. Returns a reference to this set. + + \sa operator-=(), unite(), intersect() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::empty() const + + Returns true if the set is empty. This function is provided + for STL compatibility. It is equivalent to isEmpty(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::count() const + + Same as size(). +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator<<(const T &value) + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator+=(const T &value) + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator|=(const T &value) + + Inserts a new item \a value and returns a reference to the set. + If \a value already exists in the set, the set is left unchanged. + + \sa insert() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator-=(const T &value) + + Removes the occurrence of item \a value from the set, if + it is found, and returns a reference to the set. If the + \a value is not contained the set, nothing is removed. + + \sa remove() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator|=(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator+=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Same as unite(\a other). + + \sa operator|(), operator&=(), operator-=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator&=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Same as intersect(\a other). + + \sa operator&(), operator|=(), operator-=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator&=(const T &value) + + \overload + + Same as intersect(\e{other}), if we consider \e{other} to be a set + that contains the singleton \a value. +*/ + + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> &QSet::operator-=(const QSet<T> &other) + + Same as subtract(\a{other}). + + \sa operator-(), operator|=(), operator&=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator|(const QSet<T> &other) const + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator+(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns a new QSet that is the union of this set and the + \a other set. + + \sa unite(), operator|=(), operator&(), operator-() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator&(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns a new QSet that is the intersection of this set and the + \a other set. + + \sa intersect(), operator&=(), operator|(), operator-() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator-(const QSet<T> &other) const + + Returns a new QSet that is the set difference of this set and + the \a other set, i.e., this set - \a other set. + + \sa subtract(), operator-=(), operator|(), operator&() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator-(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator|(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator+(const QSet<T> &other) + \fn QSet<T> QSet::operator&(const QSet<T> &other) + \internal + + These will go away in Qt 5. +*/ + +/*! + \class QSet::iterator + \since 4.2 + \brief The QSet::iterator class provides an STL-style non-const iterator for QSet. + + QSet features both \l{STL-style iterators} and + \l{Java-style iterators}. The STL-style iterators are more + low-level and more cumbersome to use; on the other hand, they are + slightly faster and, for developers who already know STL, have + the advantage of familiarity. + + QSet<T>::iterator allows you to iterate over a QSet and to remove + items (using QSet::erase()) while you iterate. (QSet doesn't let + you \e modify a value through an iterator, because that + would potentially require moving the value in the internal hash + table used by QSet.) If you want to iterate over a const QSet, + you should use QSet::const_iterator. It is generally good + practice to use QSet::const_iterator on a non-const QSet as well, + unless you need to change the QSet through the iterator. Const + iterators are slightly faster, and can improve code readability. + + QSet\<T\>::iterator allows you to iterate over a QSet\<T\> and + modify it as you go (using QSet::erase()). However, + + The default QSet::iterator constructor creates an uninitialized + iterator. You must initialize it using a function like + QSet::begin(), QSet::end(), or QSet::insert() before you can + start iterating. Here's a typical loop that prints all the items + stored in a set: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 8 + + Here's a loop that removes certain items (all those that start + with 'J') from a set while iterating: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 9 + + STL-style iterators can be used as arguments to \l{generic + algorithms}. For example, here's how to find an item in the set + using the qFind() algorithm: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 10 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same set. However, you may + not attempt to modify the container while iterating on it. + + \sa QSet::const_iterator, QMutableSetIterator +*/ + +/*! + \class QSet::const_iterator + \brief The QSet::const_iterator class provides an STL-style const iterator for QSet. + \since 4.2 + + QSet features both \l{STL-style iterators} and + \l{Java-style iterators}. The STL-style iterators are more + low-level and more cumbersome to use; on the other hand, they are + slightly faster and, for developers who already know STL, have + the advantage of familiarity. + + QSet\<Key, T\>::const_iterator allows you to iterate over a QSet. + If you want to modify the QSet as you iterate over it, you must + use QSet::iterator instead. It is generally good practice to use + QSet::const_iterator on a non-const QSet as well, unless you need + to change the QSet through the iterator. Const iterators are + slightly faster, and can improve code readability. + + The default QSet::const_iterator constructor creates an + uninitialized iterator. You must initialize it using a function + like QSet::begin(), QSet::end(), or QSet::insert() before you can + start iterating. Here's a typical loop that prints all the items + stored in a set: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 11 + + STL-style iterators can be used as arguments to \l{generic + algorithms}. For example, here's how to find an item in the set + using the qFind() algorithm: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 12 + + Multiple iterators can be used on the same set. However, you may + not attempt to modify the container while iterating on it. + + \sa QSet::iterator, QSetIterator +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator::iterator() + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator() + + Constructs an uninitialized iterator. + + Functions like operator*() and operator++() should not be called + on an uninitialized iterator. Use operator=() to assign a value + to it before using it. + + \sa QSet::begin(), QSet::end() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator::iterator(typename Hash::iterator i) + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator(typename Hash::const_iterator i) + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::iterator_category + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::iterator_category + + Synonyms for \e {std::bidirectional_iterator_tag} indicating + these iterators are bidirectional iterators. + */ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::difference_type + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::difference_type + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::value_type + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::value_type + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::pointer + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::pointer + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \typedef QSet::iterator::reference + \typedef QSet::const_iterator::reference + + \internal +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator::iterator(const iterator &other) + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator(const const_iterator &other) + + Constructs a copy of \a other. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::const_iterator::const_iterator(const iterator &other) + \since 4.2 + \overload + + Constructs a copy of \a other. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator=(const iterator &other) + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator=(const const_iterator &other) + + Assigns \a other to this iterator. +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T &QSet::iterator::operator*() const + \fn const T &QSet::const_iterator::operator*() const + + Returns a reference to the current item. + + \sa operator->() +*/ + +/*! + \fn const T *QSet::iterator::operator->() const + \fn const T *QSet::const_iterator::operator->() const + + Returns a pointer to the current item. + + \sa operator*() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator==(const iterator &other) const + \fn bool QSet::const_iterator::operator==(const const_iterator &other) const + + Returns true if \a other points to the same item as this + iterator; otherwise returns false. + + \sa operator!=() +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator==(const const_iterator &other) const + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator!=(const const_iterator &other) const + + \overload +*/ + +/*! + \fn bool QSet::iterator::operator!=(const iterator &other) const + \fn bool QSet::const_iterator::operator!=(const const_iterator &other) const + + Returns true if \a other points to a different item than this + iterator; otherwise returns false. + + \sa operator==() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator++() + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator++() + + The prefix ++ operator (\c{++it}) advances the iterator to the + next item in the set and returns an iterator to the new current + item. + + Calling this function on QSet::constEnd() leads to + undefined results. + + \sa operator--() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator++(int) + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator++(int) + + \overload + + The postfix ++ operator (\c{it++}) advances the iterator to the + next item in the set and returns an iterator to the previously + current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator--() + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator--() + + The prefix -- operator (\c{--it}) makes the preceding item + current and returns an iterator to the new current item. + + Calling this function on QSet::begin() leads to undefined + results. + + \sa operator++() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator--(int) + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator--(int) + + \overload + + The postfix -- operator (\c{it--}) makes the preceding item + current and returns an iterator to the previously current item. +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator+(int j) const + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator+(int j) const + + Returns an iterator to the item at \a j positions forward from + this iterator. (If \a j is negative, the iterator goes backward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator-() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator QSet::iterator::operator-(int j) const + \fn QSet::const_iterator QSet::const_iterator::operator-(int j) const + + Returns an iterator to the item at \a j positions backward from + this iterator. (If \a j is negative, the iterator goes forward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator+() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator+=(int j) + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator+=(int j) + + Advances the iterator by \a j items. (If \a j is negative, the + iterator goes backward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator-=(), operator+() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QSet::iterator &QSet::iterator::operator-=(int j) + \fn QSet::const_iterator &QSet::const_iterator::operator-=(int j) + + Makes the iterator go back by \a j items. (If \a j is negative, + the iterator goes forward.) + + This operation can be slow for large \a j values. + + \sa operator+=(), operator-() +*/ + +/*! \fn QList<T> QSet<T>::toList() const + + Returns a new QList containing the elements in the set. The + order of the elements in the QList is undefined. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 13 + + \sa fromList(), QList::fromSet(), qSort() +*/ + +/*! \fn QList<T> QSet<T>::values() const + + Returns a new QList containing the elements in the set. The + order of the elements in the QList is undefined. + + This is the same as toList(). + + \sa fromList(), QList::fromSet(), qSort() +*/ + + +/*! \fn QSet<T> QSet<T>::fromList(const QList<T> &list) + + Returns a new QSet object containing the data contained in \a + list. Since QSet doesn't allow duplicates, the resulting QSet + might be smaller than the \a list, because QList can contain + duplicates. + + Example: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qset.qdoc 14 + + \sa toList(), QList::toSet() +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream &operator<<(QDataStream &out, const QSet<T> &set) + \relates QSet + + Writes the \a set to stream \a out. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator<<(). + + \sa \link datastreamformat.html Format of the QDataStream operators \endlink +*/ + +/*! + \fn QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &in, QSet<T> &set) + \relates QSet + + Reads a set from stream \a in into \a set. + + This function requires the value type to implement \c operator>>(). + + \sa \link datastreamformat.html Format of the QDataStream operators \endlink +*/ diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp index c96e058..e1f090b 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.cpp @@ -44,507 +44,512 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! - \class QSharedData - \brief The QSharedData class is a base class for shared data objects. - \reentrant - \ingroup misc + \class QSharedData + \brief The QSharedData class is a base class for shared data objects. + \reentrant - QSharedData is designed to be used with QSharedDataPointer or - QExplicitlySharedDataPointer to implement custom \l{implicitly - shared} or explicitly shared classes. QSharedData provides - \l{thread-safe} reference counting. + QSharedData is designed to be used with QSharedDataPointer or + QExplicitlySharedDataPointer to implement custom \l{implicitly + shared} or explicitly shared classes. QSharedData provides + \l{thread-safe} reference counting. - See QSharedDataPointer and QExplicitlySharedDataPointer for details. + See QSharedDataPointer and QExplicitlySharedDataPointer for details. */ /*! \fn QSharedData::QSharedData() - Constructs a QSharedData object with a reference count of 0. + Constructs a QSharedData object with a reference count of 0. */ /*! \fn QSharedData::QSharedData(const QSharedData& other) - Constructs a QSharedData object with reference count 0. - \a other is ignored. + Constructs a QSharedData object with reference count 0. + \a other is ignored. */ /*! - \class QSharedDataPointer - \brief The QSharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an implicitly shared object. - \since 4.0 - \reentrant - \ingroup misc - \mainclass + \class QSharedDataPointer + \brief The QSharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an implicitly shared object. + \since 4.0 + \reentrant - QSharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own \l {implicitly - shared} classes easy. QSharedDataPointer implements \l {thread-safe} - reference counting, ensuring that adding QSharedDataPointers to your - \l {reentrant} classes won't make them non-reentrant. + QSharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own \l {implicitly + shared} classes easy. QSharedDataPointer implements \l {thread-safe} + reference counting, ensuring that adding QSharedDataPointers to your + \l {reentrant} classes won't make them non-reentrant. - \l {Implicit sharing} is used by many Qt classes to combine the - speed and memory efficiency of pointers with the ease of use of - classes. See the \l{Shared Classes} page for more information. + \l {Implicit sharing} is used by many Qt classes to combine the + speed and memory efficiency of pointers with the ease of use of + classes. See the \l{Shared Classes} page for more information. - \target Employee example - Suppose you want to make an \c Employee class implicitly shared. The - procedure is: + \target Employee example + Suppose you want to make an \c Employee class implicitly shared. The + procedure is: - \list + \list - \o Define the class \c Employee to have a single data member of + \o Define the class \c Employee to have a single data member of type \c {QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}. - \o Define the \c EmployeeData class derived from \l QSharedData to + \o Define the \c EmployeeData class derived from \l QSharedData to contain all the data members you would normally have put in the \c Employee class. - \endlist - - To show this in practice, we review the source code for the - implicitly shared \c Employee class. In the header file we define the - two classes \c Employee and \c EmployeeData. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 0 - - In class \c Employee, note the single data member, a \e {d pointer} - of type \c {QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}. All accesses of - employee data must go through the \e {d pointer's} \c - {operator->()}. For write accesses, \c {operator->()} will - automatically call detach(), which creates a copy of the shared data - object if the shared data object's reference count is greater than - 1. This ensures that writes to one \c Employee object don't affect - any other \c Employee objects that share the same \c EmployeeData - object. - - Class \c EmployeeData inherits QSharedData, which provides the - \e{behind the scenes} reference counter. \c EmployeeData has a default - constructor, a copy constructor, and a destructor. Normally, trivial - implementations of these are all that is needed in the \e {data} - class for an implicitly shared class. - - Implementing the two constructors for class \c Employee is also - straightforward. Both create a new instance of \c EmployeeData - and assign it to the \e{d pointer} . - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 1 - \codeline - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 2 - - Note that class \c Employee also has a trivial copy constructor - defined, which is not strictly required in this case. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 7 - - The copy constructor is not strictly required here, because class \c - EmployeeData is included in the same file as class \c Employee - (\c{employee.h}). However, including the private subclass of - QSharedData in the same file as the public class containing the - QSharedDataPointer is not typical. Normally, the idea is to hide the - private subclass of QSharedData from the user by putting it in a - separate file which would not be included in the public file. In - this case, we would normally put class \c EmployeeData in a separate - file, which would \e{not} be included in \c{employee.h}. Instead, we - would just predeclare the private subclass \c EmployeeData in \c - {employee.h} this way: - - \code - class EmployeeData; - \endcode - - If we had done it that way here, the copy constructor shown would be - required. Since the copy constructor is trivial, you might as well - just always include it. - - Behind the scenes, QSharedDataPointer automatically increments the - reference count whenever an \c Employee object is copied, assigned, - or passed as a parameter. It decrements the reference count whenever - an \c Employee object is deleted or goes out of scope. The shared - \c EmployeeData object is deleted automatically if and when the - reference count reaches 0. - - In a non-const member function of \c Employee, whenever the \e {d - pointer} is dereferenced, QSharedDataPointer automatically calls - detach() to ensure that the function operates on its own copy of the - data. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 3 - \codeline - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 4 - - Note that if detach() is called more than once in a member function - due to multiple dereferences of the \e {d pointer}, detach() will - only create a copy of the shared data the first time it is called, - if at all, because on the second and subsequent calls of detach(), - the reference count will be 1 again. - - But note that in the second \c Employee constructor, which takes an - employee ID and a name, both setId() and setName() are called, but - they don't cause \e{copy on write}, because the reference count for - the newly constructed \c EmployeeData object has just been set to 1. - - In \c Employee's \e const member functions, dereferencing the \e {d - pointer} does \e not cause detach() to be called. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 5 - \codeline - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 6 - - Notice that there is no need to implement a copy constructor or an - assignment operator for the \c Employee class, because the copy - constructor and assignment operator provided by the C++ compiler - will do the \e{member by member} shallow copy required. The only - member to copy is the \e {d pointer}, which is a QSharedDataPointer, - whose \c {operator=()} just increments the reference count of the - shared \c EmployeeData object. - - \target Implicit vs Explicit Sharing - \section1 Implicit vs Explicit Sharing - - Implicit sharing might not be right for the \c Employee class. - Consider a simple example that creates two instances of the - implicitly shared \c Employee class. - - \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/main.cpp 0 - - After the second employee e2 is created and e1 is assigned to it, - both \c e1 and \c e2 refer to Albrecht Durer, employee 1001. Both \c - Employee objects point to the same instance of \c EmployeeData, - which has reference count 2. Then \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")} is - called to change the employee name, but because the reference count - is greater than 1, a \e{copy on write} is performed before the name - is changed. Now \c e1 and \c e2 point to different \c EmployeeData - objects. They have different names, but both have ID 1001, which is - probably not what you want. You can, of course, just continue with - \c {e1.setId(1002)}, if you really mean to create a second, unique - employee, but if you only want to change the employee's name - everywhere, consider using \l {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer} - {explicit sharing} in the \c Employee class instead of implicit - sharing. - - If you declare the \e {d pointer} in the \c Employee class to be - \c {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}, then explicit - sharing is used and \e{copy on write} operations are not performed - automatically (i.e. detach() is not called in non-const - functions). In that case, after \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")}, the - employee's name has been changed, but both e1 and e2 still refer to - the same instance of \c EmployeeData, so there is only one employee - with ID 1001. - - In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers - to the internal pointer to the shared data object. - - \sa QSharedData, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer, QScopedPointer, QSharedPointer + \endlist + + To show this in practice, we review the source code for the + implicitly shared \c Employee class. In the header file we define the + two classes \c Employee and \c EmployeeData. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 0 + + In class \c Employee, note the single data member, a \e {d pointer} + of type \c {QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}. All accesses of + employee data must go through the \e {d pointer's} \c + {operator->()}. For write accesses, \c {operator->()} will + automatically call detach(), which creates a copy of the shared data + object if the shared data object's reference count is greater than + 1. This ensures that writes to one \c Employee object don't affect + any other \c Employee objects that share the same \c EmployeeData + object. + + Class \c EmployeeData inherits QSharedData, which provides the + \e{behind the scenes} reference counter. \c EmployeeData has a default + constructor, a copy constructor, and a destructor. Normally, trivial + implementations of these are all that is needed in the \e {data} + class for an implicitly shared class. + + Implementing the two constructors for class \c Employee is also + straightforward. Both create a new instance of \c EmployeeData + and assign it to the \e{d pointer} . + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 1 + \codeline + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 2 + + Note that class \c Employee also has a trivial copy constructor + defined, which is not strictly required in this case. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 7 + + The copy constructor is not strictly required here, because class \c + EmployeeData is included in the same file as class \c Employee + (\c{employee.h}). However, including the private subclass of + QSharedData in the same file as the public class containing the + QSharedDataPointer is not typical. Normally, the idea is to hide the + private subclass of QSharedData from the user by putting it in a + separate file which would not be included in the public file. In + this case, we would normally put class \c EmployeeData in a separate + file, which would \e{not} be included in \c{employee.h}. Instead, we + would just predeclare the private subclass \c EmployeeData in \c + {employee.h} this way: + + \code + class EmployeeData; + \endcode + + If we had done it that way here, the copy constructor shown would be + required. Since the copy constructor is trivial, you might as well + just always include it. + + Behind the scenes, QSharedDataPointer automatically increments the + reference count whenever an \c Employee object is copied, assigned, + or passed as a parameter. It decrements the reference count whenever + an \c Employee object is deleted or goes out of scope. The shared + \c EmployeeData object is deleted automatically if and when the + reference count reaches 0. + + In a non-const member function of \c Employee, whenever the \e {d + pointer} is dereferenced, QSharedDataPointer automatically calls + detach() to ensure that the function operates on its own copy of the + data. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 3 + \codeline + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 4 + + Note that if detach() is called more than once in a member function + due to multiple dereferences of the \e {d pointer}, detach() will + only create a copy of the shared data the first time it is called, + if at all, because on the second and subsequent calls of detach(), + the reference count will be 1 again. + + But note that in the second \c Employee constructor, which takes an + employee ID and a name, both setId() and setName() are called, but + they don't cause \e{copy on write}, because the reference count for + the newly constructed \c EmployeeData object has just been set to 1. + + In \c Employee's \e const member functions, dereferencing the \e {d + pointer} does \e not cause detach() to be called. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 5 + \codeline + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/employee.h 6 + + Notice that there is no need to implement a copy constructor or an + assignment operator for the \c Employee class, because the copy + constructor and assignment operator provided by the C++ compiler + will do the \e{member by member} shallow copy required. The only + member to copy is the \e {d pointer}, which is a QSharedDataPointer, + whose \c {operator=()} just increments the reference count of the + shared \c EmployeeData object. + + \target Implicit vs Explicit Sharing + \section1 Implicit vs Explicit Sharing + + Implicit sharing might not be right for the \c Employee class. + Consider a simple example that creates two instances of the + implicitly shared \c Employee class. + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/sharedemployee/main.cpp 0 + + After the second employee e2 is created and e1 is assigned to it, + both \c e1 and \c e2 refer to Albrecht Durer, employee 1001. Both \c + Employee objects point to the same instance of \c EmployeeData, + which has reference count 2. Then \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")} is + called to change the employee name, but because the reference count + is greater than 1, a \e{copy on write} is performed before the name + is changed. Now \c e1 and \c e2 point to different \c EmployeeData + objects. They have different names, but both have ID 1001, which is + probably not what you want. You can, of course, just continue with + \c {e1.setId(1002)}, if you really mean to create a second, unique + employee, but if you only want to change the employee's name + everywhere, consider using \l {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer} + {explicit sharing} in the \c Employee class instead of implicit + sharing. + + If you declare the \e {d pointer} in the \c Employee class to be + \c {QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>}, then explicit + sharing is used and \e{copy on write} operations are not performed + automatically (i.e. detach() is not called in non-const + functions). In that case, after \c {e1.setName("Hans Holbein")}, the + employee's name has been changed, but both e1 and e2 still refer to + the same instance of \c EmployeeData, so there is only one employee + with ID 1001. + + In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers + to the internal pointer to the shared data object. + + \sa QSharedData, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer, QScopedPointer, QSharedPointer */ /*! \fn T& QSharedDataPointer::operator*() - Provides access to the shared data object's members. - This function calls detach(). + Provides access to the shared data object's members. + This function calls detach(). */ /*! \fn const T& QSharedDataPointer::operator*() const - Provides const access to the shared data object's members. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Provides const access to the shared data object's members. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn T* QSharedDataPointer::operator->() - Provides access to the shared data object's members. - This function calls detach(). + Provides access to the shared data object's members. + This function calls detach(). */ /*! \fn const T* QSharedDataPointer::operator->() const - Provides const access to the shared data object's members. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Provides const access to the shared data object's members. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::operator T*() - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function calls detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function calls detach(). - \sa data(), constData() + \sa data(), constData() */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::operator const T*() const - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn T* QSharedDataPointer::data() - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function calls detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function calls detach(). - \sa constData() + \sa constData() */ /*! \fn const T* QSharedDataPointer::data() const - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn const T* QSharedDataPointer::constData() const - Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. + This function does \e not call detach(). - \sa data() + \sa data() */ +/*! \fn void QSharedDataPointer::swap(QSharedDataPointer &other) + Swap this instance's shared data pointer with the shared + data pointer in \a other. + */ + /*! \fn bool QSharedDataPointer::operator==(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. - This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. + This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn bool QSharedDataPointer::operator!=(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same - \e{d pointer}. This function does \e not call detach(). + Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same + \e{d pointer}. This function does \e not call detach(). */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::QSharedDataPointer() - Constructs a QSharedDataPointer initialized with a null \e{d pointer}. + Constructs a QSharedDataPointer initialized with a null \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::~QSharedDataPointer() - Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. - If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object - is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. + Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. + If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object + is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::QSharedDataPointer(T* sharedData) - Constructs a QSharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} set to - \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. + Constructs a QSharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} set to + \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer::QSharedDataPointer(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} in - \a other and increments the reference count of the shared - data object. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} in + \a other and increments the reference count of the shared + data object. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer<T>& QSharedDataPointer::operator=(const QSharedDataPointer<T>& other) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of - \a other and increments the reference count of the shared - data object. The reference count of the old shared data - object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count - of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared - data object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of + \a other and increments the reference count of the shared + data object. The reference count of the old shared data + object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count + of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared + data object is deleted. */ /*! \fn QSharedDataPointer& QSharedDataPointer::operator=(T* sharedData) - Sets the \e{d pointer} og \e this to \a sharedData and increments - \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference count of the old - shared data object of \e this is decremented. If the reference - count of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared data - object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} og \e this to \a sharedData and increments + \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference count of the old + shared data object of \e this is decremented. If the reference + count of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared data + object is deleted. */ /*! \fn bool QSharedDataPointer::operator!() const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. */ /*! \fn void QSharedDataPointer::detach() - If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this - function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the - \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. - - This function is called automatically by non-const member - functions of QSharedDataPointer if \e{copy on write} is - required. You don't need to call it yourself. + If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this + function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the + \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. + + This function is called automatically by non-const member + functions of QSharedDataPointer if \e{copy on write} is + required. You don't need to call it yourself. */ /*! \fn T *QSharedDataPointer::clone() \since 4.5 - Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function - is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in - order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator - new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. + Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function + is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in + order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator + new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. - This function is provided so that you may support "virtual copy - constructors" for your own types. In order to so, you should declare - a template-specialization of this function for your own type, like - the example below: + This function is provided so that you may support "virtual copy + constructors" for your own types. In order to so, you should declare + a template-specialization of this function for your own type, like + the example below: - \code + \code template<> EmployeeData *QSharedDataPointer<EmployeeData>::clone() { return d->clone(); } - \endcode + \endcode - In the example above, the template specialization for the clone() - function calls the \e {EmployeeData::clone()} virtual function. A - class derived from EmployeeData could override that function and - return the proper polymorphic type. + In the example above, the template specialization for the clone() + function calls the \e {EmployeeData::clone()} virtual function. A + class derived from EmployeeData could override that function and + return the proper polymorphic type. */ /*! - \class QExplicitlySharedDataPointer - \brief The QExplicitlySharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an explicitly shared object. - \since 4.4 - \reentrant - \ingroup misc - \mainclass - - QExplicitlySharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own explicitly - shared classes easy. QExplicitlySharedDataPointer implements - \l {thread-safe} reference counting, ensuring that adding - QExplicitlySharedDataPointers to your \l {reentrant} classes won't - make them non-reentrant. - - Except for one big difference, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer is just - like QSharedDataPointer. The big difference is that member functions - of QExplicitlySharedDataPointer \e{do not} do the automatic - \e{copy on write} operation (detach()) that non-const members of - QSharedDataPointer do before allowing the shared data object to be - modified. There is a detach() function available, but if you really - want to detach(), you have to call it yourself. This means that - QExplicitlySharedDataPointers behave like regular C++ pointers, - except that by doing reference counting and not deleting the shared - data object until the reference count is 0, they avoid the dangling - pointer problem. - - It is instructive to compare QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with - QSharedDataPointer by way of an example. Consider the \l {Employee - example} in QSharedDataPointer, modified to use explicit sharing as - explained in the discussion \l {Implicit vs Explicit Sharing}. - - Note that if you use this class but find you are calling detach() a - lot, you probably should be using QSharedDataPointer instead. - - In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers - to the internal pointer to the shared data object. - - \sa QSharedData, QSharedDataPointer + \class QExplicitlySharedDataPointer + \brief The QExplicitlySharedDataPointer class represents a pointer to an explicitly shared object. + \since 4.4 + \reentrant + + QExplicitlySharedDataPointer\<T\> makes writing your own explicitly + shared classes easy. QExplicitlySharedDataPointer implements + \l {thread-safe} reference counting, ensuring that adding + QExplicitlySharedDataPointers to your \l {reentrant} classes won't + make them non-reentrant. + + Except for one big difference, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer is just + like QSharedDataPointer. The big difference is that member functions + of QExplicitlySharedDataPointer \e{do not} do the automatic + \e{copy on write} operation (detach()) that non-const members of + QSharedDataPointer do before allowing the shared data object to be + modified. There is a detach() function available, but if you really + want to detach(), you have to call it yourself. This means that + QExplicitlySharedDataPointers behave like regular C++ pointers, + except that by doing reference counting and not deleting the shared + data object until the reference count is 0, they avoid the dangling + pointer problem. + + It is instructive to compare QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with + QSharedDataPointer by way of an example. Consider the \l {Employee + example} in QSharedDataPointer, modified to use explicit sharing as + explained in the discussion \l {Implicit vs Explicit Sharing}. + + Note that if you use this class but find you are calling detach() a + lot, you probably should be using QSharedDataPointer instead. + + In the member function documentation, \e{d pointer} always refers + to the internal pointer to the shared data object. + + \sa QSharedData, QSharedDataPointer */ /*! \fn T& QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator*() const - Provides access to the shared data object's members. + Provides access to the shared data object's members. */ /*! \fn T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator->() - Provides access to the shared data object's members. + Provides access to the shared data object's members. */ /*! \fn const T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator->() const - Provides const access to the shared data object's members. + Provides const access to the shared data object's members. */ /*! \fn T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::data() const - Returns a pointer to the shared data object. + Returns a pointer to the shared data object. */ /*! \fn const T* QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::constData() const - Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. + Returns a const pointer to the shared data object. - \sa data() + \sa data() */ +/*! \fn void QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::swap(QExplicitlySharedDataPointer &other) + Swap this instance's explicitly shared data pointer with + the explicitly shared data pointer in \a other. + */ + /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator==(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. + Returns true if \a other and \e this have the same \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator==(const T* ptr) const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \a ptr. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \a ptr. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator!=(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) const - Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same - \e{d pointer}. + Returns true if \a other and \e this do \e not have the same + \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator!=(const T* ptr) const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not \a ptr. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not \a ptr. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer() - Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer initialized with a null - \e{d pointer}. + Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer initialized with a null + \e{d pointer}. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::~QExplicitlySharedDataPointer() - Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. - If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object - is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. + Decrements the reference count of the shared data object. + If the reference count becomes 0, the shared data object + is deleted. \e This is then destroyed. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer(T* sharedData) - Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} - set to \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference - count. + Constructs a QExplicitlySharedDataPointer with \e{d pointer} + set to \a sharedData and increments \a{sharedData}'s reference + count. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) - This standard copy constructor sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to - the \e {d pointer} in \a other and increments the reference count of - the shared data object. + This standard copy constructor sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to + the \e {d pointer} in \a other and increments the reference count of + the shared data object. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<X>& other) - This copy constructor is different in that it allows \a other to be - a different type of explicitly shared data pointer but one that has - a compatible shared data object. It performs a static cast of the - \e{d pointer} in \a other and sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to - the converted \e{d pointer}. It increments the reference count of - the shared data object. - */ + This copy constructor is different in that it allows \a other to be + a different type of explicitly shared data pointer but one that has + a compatible shared data object. It performs a static cast of the + \e{d pointer} in \a other and sets the \e {d pointer} of \e this to + the converted \e{d pointer}. It increments the reference count of + the shared data object. +*/ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator=(const QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>& other) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of - \a other and increments the reference count of the shared - data object. The reference count of the old shared data - object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count - of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared - data object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to the \e{d pointer} of + \a other and increments the reference count of the shared + data object. The reference count of the old shared data + object of \e this is decremented. If the reference count + of the old shared data object becomes 0, the old shared + data object is deleted. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer& QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator=(T* sharedData) - Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to \a sharedData and - increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference - count of the old shared data object of \e this is decremented. - If the reference count of the old shared data object becomes - 0, the old shared data object is deleted. + Sets the \e{d pointer} of \e this to \a sharedData and + increments \a{sharedData}'s reference count. The reference + count of the old shared data object of \e this is decremented. + If the reference count of the old shared data object becomes + 0, the old shared data object is deleted. */ /*! \fn void QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::reset() - Resets \e this to be null. i.e., this function sets the - \e{d pointer} of \e this to 0, but first it decrements - the reference count of the shared data object and deletes - the shared data object if the reference count became 0. + Resets \e this to be null. i.e., this function sets the + \e{d pointer} of \e this to 0, but first it decrements + the reference count of the shared data object and deletes + the shared data object if the reference count became 0. */ /*! \fn QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator bool () const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not null. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is \e not null. */ /*! \fn bool QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::operator!() const - Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. + Returns true if the \e{d pointer} of \e this is null. */ /*! \fn void QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::detach() - If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this - function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the - \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. + If the shared data object's reference count is greater than 1, this + function creates a deep copy of the shared data object and sets the + \e{d pointer} of \e this to the copy. - Because QExplicitlySharedDataPointer does not do the automatic - \e{copy on write} operations that members of QSharedDataPointer do, - detach() is \e not called automatically anywhere in the member - functions of this class. If you find that you are calling detach() - everywhere in your code, consider using QSharedDataPointer instead. + Because QExplicitlySharedDataPointer does not do the automatic + \e{copy on write} operations that members of QSharedDataPointer do, + detach() is \e not called automatically anywhere in the member + functions of this class. If you find that you are calling detach() + everywhere in your code, consider using QSharedDataPointer instead. */ /*! \fn T *QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::clone() \since 4.5 - Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function - is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in - order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator - new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. + Creates and returns a deep copy of the current data. This function + is called by detach() when the reference count is greater than 1 in + order to create the new copy. This function uses the \e {operator + new} and calls the copy constructor of the type T. - See QSharedDataPointer::clone() for an explanation of how to use it. + See QSharedDataPointer::clone() for an explanation of how to use it. */ /*! - \typedef QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::Type + \typedef QExplicitlySharedDataPointer::Type - This is the type of the shared data object. The \e{d pointer} - points to an object of this type. - */ + This is the type of the shared data object. The \e{d pointer} + points to an object of this type. +*/ QT_END_NAMESPACE diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.h b/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.h index e13e37c..dde6e88 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.h +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qshareddata.h @@ -111,6 +111,9 @@ public: inline bool operator!() const { return !d; } + inline void swap(QSharedDataPointer &other) + { qSwap(d, other.d); } + protected: T *clone(); @@ -186,6 +189,9 @@ public: inline bool operator!() const { return !d; } + inline void swap(QExplicitlySharedDataPointer &other) + { qSwap(d, other.d); } + protected: T *clone(); @@ -235,6 +241,14 @@ template <class T> Q_INLINE_TEMPLATE QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T>::QExplicitlySharedDataPointer(T *adata) : d(adata) { if (d) d->ref.ref(); } +template <class T> +Q_INLINE_TEMPLATE void qSwap(QSharedDataPointer<T> &p1, QSharedDataPointer<T> &p2) +{ p1.swap(p2); } + +template <class T> +Q_INLINE_TEMPLATE void qSwap(QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T> &p1, QExplicitlySharedDataPointer<T> &p2) +{ p1.swap(p2); } + QT_END_NAMESPACE QT_END_HEADER diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp index f0e85d2..641d990 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer.cpp @@ -50,7 +50,6 @@ \since 4.5 \reentrant - \ingroup misc The QSharedPointer is an automatic, shared pointer in C++. It behaves exactly like a normal pointer for normal purposes, @@ -112,6 +111,249 @@ cases, since they have the same functionality. See \l{QWeakPointer#tracking-qobject} for more information. + \section1 Optional pointer tracking + + A feature of QSharedPointer that can be enabled at compile-time for + debugging purposes is a pointer tracking mechanism. When enabled, + QSharedPointer registers in a global set all the pointers that it tracks. + This allows one to catch mistakes like assigning the same pointer to two + QSharedPointer objects. + + This function is enabled by defining the \tt{QT_SHAREDPOINTER_TRACK_POINTERS} + macro before including the QSharedPointer header. + + It is safe to use this feature even with code compiled without the + feature. QSharedPointer will ensure that the pointer is removed from the + tracker even from code compiled without pointer tracking. + + Note, however, that the pointer tracking feature has limitations on + multiple- or virtual-inheritance (that is, in cases where two different + pointer addresses can refer to the same object). In that case, if a + pointer is cast to a different type and its value changes, + QSharedPointer's pointer tracking mechanism mail fail to detect that the + object being tracked is the same. + + \omit + \secton1 QSharedPointer internals + + QSharedPointer is in reality implemented by two ancestor classes: + QtSharedPointer::Basic and QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCount. The reason + for having that split is now mostly legacy: in the beginning, + QSharedPointer was meant to support both internal reference counting and + external reference counting. + + QtSharedPointer::Basic implements the basic functionality that is shared + between internal- and external-reference counting. That is, it's mostly + the accessor functions into QSharedPointer. Those are all inherited by + QSharedPointer, which adds another level of shared functionality (the + constructors and assignment operators). The Basic class has one member + variable, which is the actual pointer being tracked. + + QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCount implements the actual reference + counting and introduces the d-pointer for QSharedPointer. That d-pointer + itself is shared with with other QSharedPointer objects as well as + QWeakPointer. + + The reason for keeping the pointer value itself outside the d-pointer is + because of multiple inheritance needs. If you have two QSharedPointer + objects of different pointer types, but pointing to the same object in + memory, it could happen that the pointer values are different. The \tt + differentPointers autotest exemplifies this problem. The same thing could + happen in the case of virtual inheritance: a pointer of class matching + the virtual base has different address compared to the pointer of the + complete object. See the \tt virtualBaseDifferentPointers autotest for + this problem. + + The d pointer is of type QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCountData for simple + QSharedPointer objects, but could be of a derived type in some cases. It + is basically a reference-counted reference-counter. + + \section2 d-pointer + \section3 QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCountData + + This class is basically a reference-counted reference-counter. It has two + members: \tt strongref and \tt weakref. The strong reference counter is + controlling the lifetime of the object tracked by QSharedPointer. a + positive value indicates that the object is alive. It's also the number + of QSharedObject instances that are attached to this Data. + + When the strong reference count decreases to zero, the object is deleted + (see below for information on custom deleters). The strong reference + count can also exceptionally be -1, indicating that there are no + QSharedPointers attached to an object, which is tracked too. The only + case where this is possible is that of + \l{QWeakPointer#tracking-qobject}{QWeakPointers tracking a QObject}. + + The weak reference count controls the lifetime of the d-pointer itself. + It can be thought of as an internal/intrusive reference count for + ExternalRefCountData itself. This count is equal to the number of + QSharedPointers and QWeakPointers that are tracking this object. (In case + the object tracked derives from QObject, this number is increased by 1, + since QObjectPrivate tracks it too). + + ExternalRefCountData is a virtual class: it has a virtual destructor and + a virtual destroy() function. The destroy() function is supposed to + delete the object being tracked and return true if it does so. Otherwise, + it returns false to indicate that the caller must simply call delete. + This allows the normal use-case of QSharedPointer without custom deleters + to use only one 12- or 16-byte (depending on whether it's a 32- or 64-bit + architecture) external descriptor structure, without paying the price for + the custom deleter that it isn't using. + + \section3 QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn + + This class is not used directly, per se. It only exists to enable the two + classes that derive from it. It adds one member variable, which is a + pointer to a function (which returns void and takes an + ExternalRefCountData* as a parameter). It also overrides the destroy() + function: it calls that function pointer with \tt this as parameter, and + returns true. + + That means when ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn is used, the \tt + destroyer field must be set to a valid function that \b will delete the + object tracked. + + This class also adds an operator delete function to ensure that simply + calls the global operator delete. That should be the behaviour in all + compilers already, but to be on the safe side, this class ensures that no + funny business happens. + + On a 32-bit architecture, this class is 16 bytes in size, whereas it's 24 + bytes on 64-bit. (On Itanium where function pointers contain the global + pointer, it can be 32 bytes). + + \section3 QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter + + This class derives from ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn and is a + template class. As template parameters, it has the type of the pointer + being tracked (\tt T) and a \tt Deleter, which is anything. It adds two + fields to its parent class, matching those template parameters: a member + of type \tt Deleter and a member of type \tt T*. + + The purpose of this class is to store the pointer to be deleted and the + deleter code along with the d-pointer. This allows the last strong + reference to call any arbitrary function that disposes of the object. For + example, this allows calling QObject::deleteLater() on a given object. + The pointer to the object is kept here to avoid the extra cost of keeping + the deleter in the generic case. + + This class is never instantiated directly: the constructors and + destructor are private. Only the create() function may be called to + return an object of this type. See below for construction details. + + The size of this class depends on the size of \tt Deleter. If it's an + empty functor (i.e., no members), ABIs generally assign it the size of 1. + But given that it's followed by a pointer, up to 3 or 7 padding bytes may + be inserted: in that case, the size of this class is 16+4+4 = 24 bytes on + 32-bit architectures, or 24+8+8 = 40 bytes on 64-bit architectures (48 + bytes on Itanium with global pointers stored). If \tt Deleter is a + function pointer, the size should be the same as the empty structure + case, except for Itanium where it may be 56 bytes due to another global + pointer. If \tt Deleter is a pointer to a member function (PMF), the size + will be even bigger and will depend on the ABI. For architectures using + the Itanium C++ ABI, a PMF is twice the size of a normal pointer, or 24 + bytes on Itanium itself. In that case, the size of this structure will be + 16+8+4 = 28 bytes on 32-bit architectures, 24+16+8 = 48 bytes on 64-bit, + and 32+24+8 = 64 bytes on Itanium. + + (Values for Itanium consider an LP64 architecture; for ILP32, pointers + are 32-bit in length, function pointers are 64-bit and PMF are 96-bit, so + the sizes are slightly less) + + \section3 QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCountWithContiguousData + + This class also derives from ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn and it is + also a template class. The template parameter is the type \tt T of the + class which QSharedPointer tracks. It adds only one member to its parent, + which is of type \tt T (the actual type, not a pointer to it). + + The purpose of this class is to lay the \tt T object out next to the + reference counts, saving one memory allocation per shared pointer. This + is particularly interesting for small \tt T or for the cases when there + are few if any QWeakPointer tracking the object. This class exists to + implement the QSharedPointer::create() call. + + Like ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter, this class is never instantiated + directly. This class also provides a create() member that returns the + pointer, and hides its constructors and destructor. (With C++0x, we'd + delete them). + + The size of this class depends on the size of \tt T. + + \section3 Instantiating ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter and ExternalRefCountWithContiguousData + + Like explained above, these classes have private constructors. Moreover, + they are not defined anywhere, so trying to call \tt{new ClassType} would + result in a compilation or linker error. Instead, these classes must be + constructed via their create() methods. + + Instead of instantiating the class by the normal way, the create() method + calls \tt{operator new} directly with the size of the class, then calls + the parent class's constructor only (ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn). + This ensures that the inherited members are initialised properly, as well + as the virtual table pointer, which must point to + ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn's virtual table. That way, we also + ensure that the virtual destructor being called is + ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn's. + + After initialising the base class, the + ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter::create() function initialises the new + members directly, by using the placement \tt{operator new}. In the case + of the ExternalRefCountWithContiguousData::create() function, the address + to the still-uninitialised \tt T member is saved for the callee to use. + The member is only initialised in QSharedPointer::create(), so that we + avoid having many variants of the internal functions according to the + arguments in use for calling the constructor. + + When initialising the parent class, the create() functions pass the + address of the static deleter() member function. That is, when the + virtual destroy() is called by QSharedPointer, the deleter() functions + are called instead. These functiosn static_cast the ExternalRefCountData* + parameter to their own type and execute their deletion: for the + ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter::deleter() case, it runs the user's + custom deleter, then destroys the deleter; for + ExternalRefCountWithContiguousData::deleter, it simply calls the \tt T + destructor directly. + + By not calling the constructor of the derived classes, we avoid + instantiating their virtual tables. Since these classes are + template-based, there would be one virtual table per \tt T and \tt + Deleter type. (This is what Qt 4.5 did) + + Instead, only one non-inline function is required per template, which is + the deleter() static member. All the other functions can be inlined. + What's more, the address of deleter() is calculated only in code, which + can be resolved at link-time if the linker can determine that the + function lies in the current application or library module (since these + classes are not exported, that is the case for Windows or for builds with + \tt{-fvisibility=hidden}). + + In contrast, a virtual table would require at least 3 relocations to be + resolved at module load-time, per module where these classes are used. + (In the Itanium C++ ABI, there would be more relocations, due to the + RTTI) + + \section3 Modifications due to pointer-tracking + + To ensure that pointers created with pointer-tracking enabled get + un-tracked when destroyed, even if destroyed by code compiled without the + feature, QSharedPointer modifies slightly the instructions of the + previous sections. + + When ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter or + ExternalRefCountWithContiguousData are used, their create() functions + will set the ExternalRefCountDataWithDestroyFn::destroyer function + pointer to safetyCheckDeleter() instead. These static member functions + simply call internalSafetyCheckRemove2() before passing control to the + normal deleter() function. + + If neither custom deleter nor QSharedPointer::create() are used, then + QSharedPointer uses a custom deleter of its own: the normalDeleter() + function, which simply calls \tt delete. By using a custom deleter, the + safetyCheckDeleter() procedure described above kicks in. + + \endomit + \sa QSharedDataPointer, QWeakPointer, QScopedPointer */ @@ -120,7 +362,6 @@ \brief The QWeakPointer class holds a weak reference to a shared pointer \since 4.5 \reentrant - \ingroup misc The QWeakPointer is an automatic weak reference to a pointer in C++. It cannot be used to dereference the pointer @@ -187,6 +428,29 @@ QWeakPointers created from QObject should never be passed to code that hasn't been recompiled. + \omit + \secton1 QWeakPointer internals + + QWeakPointer shares most of its internal functionality with + \l{QSharedPointer#qsharedpointer-internals}{QSharedPointer}, so see that + class's internal documentation for more information. + + QWeakPointer requires an external reference counter in order to operate. + Therefore, it is incompatible by design with \l QSharedData-derived + classes. + + It has a special QObject constructor, which works by calling + QtSharedPointer::ExternalRefCountData::getAndRef, which retrieves the + d-pointer from QObjectPrivate. If one isn't set yet, that function + creates the d-pointer and atomically sets it. + + If getAndRef needs to create a d-pointer, it sets the strongref to -1, + indicating that the QObject is not shared: QWeakPointer is used only to + determine whether the QObject has been deleted. In that case, it cannot + be upgraded to QSharedPointer (see the previous section). + + \endomit + \sa QSharedPointer, QScopedPointer */ @@ -951,7 +1215,7 @@ #include <qmutex.h> #if !defined(QT_NO_QOBJECT) -#include "../kernel/qobject_p.h" +#include "private/qobject_p.h" QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer_impl.h b/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer_impl.h index e381433..bce4c64 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer_impl.h +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qsharedpointer_impl.h @@ -115,6 +115,9 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { template <class T> struct RemovePointer<QSharedPointer<T> > { typedef T Type; }; template <class T> struct RemovePointer<QWeakPointer<T> > { typedef T Type; }; + // This class provides the basic functionality of a pointer wrapper. + // Its existence is mostly legacy, since originally QSharedPointer + // could also be used for internally-refcounted objects. template <class T> class Basic { @@ -161,6 +164,12 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { Type *value; }; + // This class is the d-pointer of QSharedPointer and QWeakPointer. + // + // It is a reference-counted reference counter. "strongref" is the inner + // reference counter, and it tracks the lifetime of the pointer itself. + // "weakref" is the outer reference counter and it tracks the lifetime of + // the ExternalRefCountData object. struct ExternalRefCountData { QBasicAtomicInt weakref; @@ -168,12 +177,15 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { inline ExternalRefCountData() { - QBasicAtomicInt proto = Q_BASIC_ATOMIC_INITIALIZER(1); - weakref = strongref = proto; + strongref = 1; + weakref = 1; } inline ExternalRefCountData(Qt::Initialization) { } virtual inline ~ExternalRefCountData() { Q_ASSERT(!weakref); Q_ASSERT(strongref <= 0); } + // overridden by derived classes + // returns false to indicate caller should delete the pointer + // returns true in case it has already done so virtual inline bool destroy() { return false; } #ifndef QT_NO_QOBJECT @@ -184,18 +196,8 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { }; // sizeof(ExternalRefCount) = 12 (32-bit) / 16 (64-bit) - template <class T, typename Deleter> - struct CustomDeleter - { - Deleter deleter; - T *ptr; - - inline CustomDeleter(T *p, Deleter d) : deleter(d), ptr(p) {} - }; - // sizeof(CustomDeleter) = sizeof(Deleter) + sizeof(void*) - // for Deleter = function pointer: 8 (32-bit) / 16 (64-bit) - // for Deleter = PMF: 12 (32-bit) / 24 (64-bit) (GCC) - + // This class extends ExternalRefCountData with a pointer + // to a function, which is called by the destroy() function. struct ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn: public ExternalRefCountData { typedef void (*DestroyerFn)(ExternalRefCountData *); @@ -210,13 +212,26 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { }; // sizeof(ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn) = 16 (32-bit) / 24 (64-bit) + // This class extends ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn and implements + // the static function that deletes the object. The pointer and the + // custom deleter are kept in the "extra" member. template <class T, typename Deleter> struct ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter: public ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn { typedef ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter Self; - typedef ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn Parent; - typedef CustomDeleter<T, Deleter> Next; - Next extra; + typedef ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn BaseClass; + + struct CustomDeleter + { + Deleter deleter; + T *ptr; + + inline CustomDeleter(T *p, Deleter d) : deleter(d), ptr(p) {} + }; + CustomDeleter extra; + // sizeof(CustomDeleter) = sizeof(Deleter) + sizeof(void*) + // for Deleter = function pointer: 8 (32-bit) / 16 (64-bit) + // for Deleter = PMF: 12 (32-bit) / 24 (64-bit) (GCC) static inline void deleter(ExternalRefCountData *self) { @@ -224,7 +239,7 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { executeDeleter(realself->extra.ptr, realself->extra.deleter); // delete the deleter too - realself->extra.~Next(); + realself->extra.~CustomDeleter(); } static void safetyCheckDeleter(ExternalRefCountData *self) { @@ -242,8 +257,8 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { Self *d = static_cast<Self *>(::operator new(sizeof(Self))); // initialize the two sub-objects - new (&d->extra) Next(ptr, userDeleter); - new (d) Parent(destroy); // can't throw + new (&d->extra) CustomDeleter(ptr, userDeleter); + new (d) BaseClass(destroy); // can't throw return d; } @@ -253,6 +268,10 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { ~ExternalRefCountWithCustomDeleter(); }; + // This class extends ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn and adds a "T" + // member. That way, when the create() function is called, we allocate + // memory for both QSharedPointer's d-pointer and the actual object being + // tracked. template <class T> struct ExternalRefCountWithContiguousData: public ExternalRefCountWithDestroyFn { @@ -295,6 +314,8 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { ~ExternalRefCountWithContiguousData(); }; + // This is the main body of QSharedPointer. It implements the + // external reference counting functionality. template <class T> class ExternalRefCount: public Basic<T> { @@ -370,6 +391,12 @@ namespace QtSharedPointer { delete this->value; } + inline void internalSwap(ExternalRefCount &other) + { + qSwap(d, other.d); + qSwap(this->value, other.value); + } + #if defined(Q_NO_TEMPLATE_FRIENDS) public: #else @@ -450,6 +477,9 @@ public: inline QSharedPointer<T> &operator=(const QWeakPointer<X> &other) { BaseClass::internalSet(other.d, other.value); return *this; } + inline void swap(QSharedPointer &other) + { internalSwap(other); } + template <class X> QSharedPointer<X> staticCast() const { @@ -673,6 +703,12 @@ Q_INLINE_TEMPLATE QWeakPointer<T> QSharedPointer<T>::toWeakRef() const return QWeakPointer<T>(*this); } +template <class T> +inline void qSwap(QSharedPointer<T> &p1, QSharedPointer<T> &p2) +{ + p1.swap(p2); +} + namespace QtSharedPointer { // helper functions: template <class X, class T> diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp index 6168fe9..a165917 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qsize.cpp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE /*! \class QSize - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting \brief The QSize class defines the size of a two-dimensional object using integer point precision. @@ -432,7 +432,7 @@ QDebug operator<<(QDebug dbg, const QSize &s) { \brief The QSizeF class defines the size of a two-dimensional object using floating point precision. - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup painting A size is specified by a width() and a height(). It can be set in the constructor and changed using the setWidth(), setHeight(), or diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp index f89149a..f97e546 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstack.cpp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QStack\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It implements diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp index c36bf6e..34178c1 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstring.cpp @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ const QString::Null QString::null = { }; \internal - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing When you get an object of type QCharRef, if you can assign to it, the assignment will apply to the character in the string from @@ -381,8 +381,8 @@ const QString::Null QString::null = { }; \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + QString stores a string of 16-bit \l{QChar}s, where each QChar corresponds one Unicode 4.0 character. (Unicode characters @@ -6942,7 +6942,7 @@ QString QString::fromRawData(const QChar *unicode, int size) /*! \class QLatin1String \brief The QLatin1String class provides a thin wrapper around an ASCII/Latin-1 encoded string literal. - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant Many of QString's member functions are overloaded to accept @@ -7564,7 +7564,7 @@ QDataStream &operator>>(QDataStream &in, QString &str) \brief The QStringRef class provides a thin wrapper around QString substrings. \reentrant \ingroup tools - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing QStringRef provides a read-only subset of the QString API. diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp index 344e95b..04fbb93 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstringbuilder.cpp @@ -52,8 +52,8 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + Unlike \c QLatin1String, a \c QLatin1Literal can retrieve its size without iterating over the literal. @@ -92,8 +92,8 @@ \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + To build a QString by multiple concatenations, QString::operator+() is typically used. This causes \e{n - 1} reallocations when building diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp index 952609e..231f74e 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstringlist.cpp @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text - \mainclass + \ingroup string-processing + \reentrant QStringList inherits from QList<QString>. Like QList, QStringList is diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp index 75e1d45..8eb8238 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qstringmatcher.cpp @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ static inline int bm_find(const ushort *uc, uint l, int index, const ushort *puc can be quickly matched in a Unicode string. \ingroup tools - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing This class is useful when you have a sequence of \l{QChar}s that you want to repeatedly match against some strings (perhaps in a diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp index bf1d654..8768a16 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qtextboundaryfinder.cpp @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ static void init(QTextBoundaryFinder::BoundaryType type, const QChar *chars, int \since 4.4 \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \ingroup text + \ingroup string-processing \reentrant QTextBoundaryFinder allows to find Unicode text boundaries in a diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp index 11d4c43..c0ca931 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qtimeline.cpp @@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ void QTimeLinePrivate::setCurrentTime(int msecs) \class QTimeLine \brief The QTimeLine class provides a timeline for controlling animations. \since 4.2 - \ingroup multimedia + \ingroup animation It's most commonly used to animate a GUI control by calling a slot periodically. You can construct a timeline by passing its duration in diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qvarlengtharray.qdoc b/src/corelib/tools/qvarlengtharray.qdoc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9cc7bef --- /dev/null +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qvarlengtharray.qdoc @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +/**************************************************************************** +** +** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies). +** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com) +** +** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit. +** +** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$ +** No Commercial Usage +** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed. +** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions +** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the +** Beta Release License Agreement. +** +** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser +** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements +** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. +** +** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain +** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL +** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this +** package. +** +** GNU General Public License Usage +** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU +** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software +** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the +** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to +** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be +** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html. +** +** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please +** contact the sales department at http://qt.nokia.com/contact. +** $QT_END_LICENSE$ +** +****************************************************************************/ + +/*! + \class QVarLengthArray + \brief The QVarLengthArray class provides a low-level variable-length array. + + \ingroup tools + \reentrant + + The C++ language doesn't support variable-length arrays on the stack. + For example, the following code won't compile: + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 0 + + The alternative is to allocate the array on the heap (with + \c{new}): + + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 1 + + However, if myfunc() is called very frequently from the + application's inner loop, heap allocation can be a major source + of slowdown. + + QVarLengthArray is an attempt to work around this gap in the C++ + language. It allocates a certain number of elements on the stack, + and if you resize the array to a larger size, it automatically + uses the heap instead. Stack allocation has the advantage that + it is much faster than heap allocation. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 2 + + In the example above, QVarLengthArray will preallocate 1024 + elements on the stack and use them unless \c{n + 1} is greater + than 1024. If you omit the second template argument, + QVarLengthArray's default of 256 is used. + + QVarLengthArray's value type must be an \l{assignable data type}. + This covers most data types that are commonly used, but the + compiler won't let you, for example, store a QWidget as a value; + instead, store a QWidget *. + + QVarLengthArray, like QVector, provides a resizable array data + structure. The main differences between the two classes are: + + \list + \o QVarLengthArray's API is much more low-level. It provides no + iterators and lacks much of QVector's functionality. + + \o QVarLengthArray doesn't initialize the memory if the value is + a basic type. (QVector always does.) + + \o QVector uses \l{implicit sharing} as a memory optimization. + QVarLengthArray doesn't provide that feature; however, it + usually produces slightly better performance due to reduced + overhead, especially in tight loops. + \endlist + + In summary, QVarLengthArray is a low-level optimization class + that only makes sense in very specific cases. It is used a few + places inside Qt and was added to Qt's public API for the + convenience of advanced users. + + \sa QVector, QList, QLinkedList +*/ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray::QVarLengthArray(int size) + + Constructs an array with an initial size of \a size elements. + + If the value type is a primitive type (e.g., char, int, float) or + a pointer type (e.g., QWidget *), the elements are not + initialized. For other types, the elements are initialized with a + \l{default-constructed value}. +*/ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray::~QVarLengthArray() + + Destroys the array. +*/ + +/*! \fn int QVarLengthArray::size() const + + Returns the number of elements in the array. + + \sa isEmpty(), resize() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QVarLengthArray::count() const + + Same as size(). + + \sa isEmpty(), resize() +*/ + +/*! \fn bool QVarLengthArray::isEmpty() const + + Returns true if the array has size 0; otherwise returns false. + + \sa size(), resize() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QVarLengthArray::clear() + + Removes all the elements from the array. + + Same as resize(0). +*/ + +/*! \fn void QVarLengthArray::resize(int size) + + Sets the size of the array to \a size. If \a size is greater than + the current size, elements are added to the end. If \a size is + less than the current size, elements are removed from the end. + + If the value type is a primitive type (e.g., char, int, float) or + a pointer type (e.g., QWidget *), new elements are not + initialized. For other types, the elements are initialized with a + \l{default-constructed value}. + + \sa size() +*/ + +/*! \fn int QVarLengthArray::capacity() const + + Returns the maximum number of elements that can be stored in the + array without forcing a reallocation. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QVarLengthArray's memory usage. In general, you will rarely ever + need to call this function. If you want to know how many items are + in the array, call size(). + + \sa reserve() +*/ + +/*! \fn void QVarLengthArray::reserve(int size) + + Attempts to allocate memory for at least \a size elements. If you + know in advance how large the array can get, you can call this + function and if you call resize() often, you are likely to get + better performance. If \a size is an underestimate, the worst + that will happen is that the QVarLengthArray will be a bit + slower. + + The sole purpose of this function is to provide a means of fine + tuning QVarLengthArray's memory usage. In general, you will + rarely ever need to call this function. If you want to change the + size of the array, call resize(). + + \sa capacity() +*/ + +/*! \fn T &QVarLengthArray::operator[](int i) + + Returns a reference to the item at index position \a i. + + \a i must be a valid index position in the array (i.e., 0 <= \a i + < size()). + + \sa data() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T &QVarLengthArray::operator[](int i) const + + \overload +*/ + + +/*! + \fn void QVarLengthArray::append(const T &t) + + Appends item \a t to the array, extending the array if necessary. + + \sa removeLast() +*/ + + +/*! + \fn inline void QVarLengthArray::removeLast() + \since 4.5 + + Decreases the size of the array by one. The allocated size is not changed. + + \sa append() +*/ + +/*! + \fn void QVarLengthArray::append(const T *buf, int size) + + Appends \a size amount of items referenced by \a buf to this array. +*/ + + +/*! \fn T *QVarLengthArray::data() + + Returns a pointer to the data stored in the array. The pointer can + be used to access and modify the items in the array. + + Example: + \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_qvarlengtharray.qdoc 3 + + The pointer remains valid as long as the array isn't reallocated. + + This function is mostly useful to pass an array to a function + that accepts a plain C++ array. + + \sa constData(), operator[]() +*/ + +/*! \fn const T *QVarLengthArray::data() const + + \overload +*/ + +/*! \fn const T *QVarLengthArray::constData() const + + Returns a const pointer to the data stored in the array. The + pointer can be used to access the items in the array. The + pointer remains valid as long as the array isn't reallocated. + + This function is mostly useful to pass an array to a function + that accepts a plain C++ array. + + \sa data(), operator[]() +*/ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray<T, Prealloc> &QVarLengthArray::operator=(const QVarLengthArray<T, Prealloc> &other) + Assigns \a other to this array and returns a reference to this array. + */ + +/*! \fn QVarLengthArray::QVarLengthArray(const QVarLengthArray<T, Prealloc> &other) + Constructs a copy of \a other. + */ + diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp b/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp index 67c4f74..e5c2c6a 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/tools/qvector.cpp @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ int QVectorData::grow(int sizeofTypedData, int size, int sizeofT, bool excessive \ingroup tools \ingroup shared - \mainclass + \reentrant QVector\<T\> is one of Qt's generic \l{container classes}. It diff --git a/src/corelib/tools/tools.pri b/src/corelib/tools/tools.pri index e6c6169..464c60f 100644 --- a/src/corelib/tools/tools.pri +++ b/src/corelib/tools/tools.pri @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ SOURCES += \ tools/qhash.cpp \ tools/qline.cpp \ tools/qlinkedlist.cpp \ - tools/qlistdata.cpp \ + tools/qlist.cpp \ tools/qlocale.cpp \ tools/qpoint.cpp \ tools/qmap.cpp \ @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ contains(QT_CONFIG, zlib) { ../3rdparty/zlib/uncompr.c \ ../3rdparty/zlib/zutil.c } else:!contains(QT_CONFIG, no-zlib) { - unix:LIBS += -lz + unix:LIBS_PRIVATE += -lz # win32:LIBS += libz.lib } @@ -114,4 +114,6 @@ HEADERS += tools/qharfbuzz_p.h INCLUDEPATH += ../3rdparty/md5 \ ../3rdparty/md4 -!macx-icc:unix:!symbian:!vxworks:LIBS += -lm +# Note: libm should be present by default becaue this is C++ +!macx-icc:!vxworks:!symbian:unix:LIBS_PRIVATE += -lm + diff --git a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp index b5fe241..004e823 100644 --- a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.cpp @@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ #include "qxmlutils_p.h" #include <qdebug.h> -#include <QFile> +#include <qfile.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <qtextcodec.h> #include <qstack.h> #include <qbuffer.h> #ifndef QT_BOOTSTRAPPED -#include <QCoreApplication> +#include <qcoreapplication.h> #else // This specialization of Q_DECLARE_TR_FUNCTIONS is not in qcoreapplication.h, // because that header depends on QObject being available, which is not the @@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ QXmlStreamEntityResolver *QXmlStreamReader::entityResolver() const \brief The QXmlStreamReader class provides a fast parser for reading well-formed XML via a simple streaming API. - \mainclass + \ingroup xml-tools QXmlStreamReader is a faster and more convenient replacement for @@ -2793,7 +2793,7 @@ QStringRef QXmlStreamReader::documentEncoding() const \brief The QXmlStreamWriter class provides an XML writer with a simple streaming API. - \mainclass + \inmodule QtXml \ingroup xml-tools diff --git a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.h b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.h index c7ebf28..89585bc 100644 --- a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.h +++ b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlstream.h @@ -42,13 +42,13 @@ #ifndef QXMLSTREAM_H #define QXMLSTREAM_H -#include <QtCore/QIODevice> +#include <QtCore/qiodevice.h> #ifndef QT_NO_XMLSTREAM -#include <QtCore/QString> -#include <QtCore/QVector> -#include <QtCore/QScopedPointer> +#include <QtCore/qstring.h> +#include <QtCore/qvector.h> +#include <QtCore/qscopedpointer.h> QT_BEGIN_HEADER diff --git a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils.cpp b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils.cpp index 036869b..d9219be 100644 --- a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils.cpp +++ b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils.cpp @@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ ** ****************************************************************************/ -#include <QRegExp> -#include <QString> +#include <qregexp.h> +#include <qstring.h> #include "qxmlutils_p.h" diff --git a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils_p.h b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils_p.h index 431c0ad..6e7ba7b 100644 --- a/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils_p.h +++ b/src/corelib/xml/qxmlutils_p.h @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ // We mean it. // -#include <QtCore/QString> +#include <QtCore/qstring.h> QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE |